Regulatory Guide 1.208: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
Line 16: Line 16:
| page count = 53
| page count = 53
}}
}}
{{#Wiki_filter:The U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) issues regulatory guides to describe and make available to the public methods that the NRC staffconsiders acceptable for use in implementing specific parts of the agency's regulations, techniques that the staff uses in evaluating specific problems orpostulated accidents, and data that the staff need in reviewing applications for permits and licenses.  Regulatory guides are not substitutes forregulations, and compliance with them is not required.  Methods and solutions that differ from those set forth in regulatory guides will be deemedacceptable if they provide a basis for the findings required for the issuance or continuance of a permit or license by the Commission.This guide was issued after consideration of comments received from the public.  The NRC staff encourages and welcomes comments and suggestionsin connection with improvements to published regulatory guides, as well as items for inclusion in regulatory guides that are currently being developed. The NRC staff will revise existing guides, as appropriate, to accommodate comments and to reflect new information or experience.  Written commentsmay be submitted to the Rules and Directives Branch, Office of Administration, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC 20555-0001.Regulatory guides are issued in 10 broad divisions:  1, Power Reactors; 2, Research and Test Reactors; 3, Fuels and Materials Facilities; 4,Environmental and Siting; 5, Materials and Plant Protection; 6, Products; 7, Transportation; 8, Occupational Health; 9, Antitrust and Financial Review;and 10, General.Requests for single copies of draft or active regulatory guides (which may be reproduced) should be made to the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission,Washington, DC 20555, Attention: Reproduction and Distribution Services Section, or by fax to (301) 415-2289; or by email to Distribution@nrc.gov. Electronic copies of this guide and other recently issued guides are available through the NRC's public Web site under the Regulatory Guides documentcollection of the NRC's Electronic Reading Room at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/doc-collections/ and through the NRC's Agencywide DocumentsAccess and Management System (ADAMS) at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/adams.html, under Accession No. ML070310619.U.S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSIONMarch 2007REGULATORY GUIDEOFFICE OF NUCLEAR REGULATORY RESEARCHREGULATORY GUIDE 1.208(Draft was issued as DG-1146, dated October 2006)A PERFORMANCE-BASED APPROACH TO DEFINETHE SITE-SPECIFIC EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION
{{#Wiki_filter:The U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) issues regulatory guides to describe and make available to the public methods that the NRC staffconsiders acceptable for use in implementing specific parts of the agency's regulations, techniques that the staff uses in evaluating specific problems orpostulated accidents, and data that the staff need in reviewing applications for permits and licenses.  Regulatory guides are n ot substitutes forregulations, and compliance with them is not required.  Methods and solutions that differ from those set forth in regulatory guides will be deemedacceptable if they provide a basis for the findings required for the issuance or continuance of a permit or license by the Comm ission.This guide was issued after consideration of comments received from the public.  The NRC staff encourages and welcomes comments and suggestionsin connection with improvements to published regulatory guides, as well as items for inclusion in regulatory guides that are currently being developed. The NRC staff will revise existing guides, as appropriate, to accommodate comments and to reflect new information or experience.  Written commentsmay be submitted to the Rules and Directives Branch, Office of Administration, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC 20555-0001.Regulatory guides are issued in 10 broad divisions:  1, Power Reactors; 2, Research and Test Reactors; 3, Fuels and Materials Facilities; 4,Environmental and Siting; 5, Materials and Plant Protection; 6, Products; 7, Transportation; 8, Occupational Health; 9, Antitrust and Financial Review;and 10, General.Requests for single copies of draft or active regulatory guides (which may be reproduced) should be made to the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission,Washington, DC 20555, Attention: Reproduction and Distribution Services Section, or by fax to (301) 415-2289; or by email to Distribution@nrc.gov. Electronic copies of this guide and other recently issued guides are available thr ough the NRC's public Web site under the Regulatory Guides documentcollection of the NRC's El ectronic Reading Room at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/doc-collections/
and through the NRC's Agencywide DocumentsAccess and Management System (ADAMS) at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/adams.html, under Accession No. ML070310619.U.S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSIONMarch 2007 REGULATORY GUIDEOFFICE OF NUCLEAR REGULATORY RESEARCHREGULATORY GUIDE 1.208(Draft was issued as DG-1146, dated October 2006)A PERFORMANCE-BASED APPROACH TO DEFINETHE SITE-SPECIFIC EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION


==A. INTRODUCTION==
==A. INTRODUCTION==
This regulatory guide provides an alternative for use in satisfying the requirements set forth inSection 100.23,"Geologic and Seismic Siting Criteria," of Title 10, Part 100, of the Code of FederalRegulations (10 CFR Part 100), "Reactor Site Criteria" (Ref. 1).  The NRC staff incorporateddevelopments in ground motion estimation models; updated models for earthquake sources; methods for determining site response; and new methods for defining a site-specific, performance-based earthquake ground motion that satisfy the requirements of 10 CFR 100.23 and lead to the establishment of the safe shutdown earthquake ground motion (SSE).  The purpose of this regulatory guide is to provide guidance on the development of the site-specific ground motion response spectrum (GMRS).  The GMRS
This regulatory guide provides an alternative for use in satisfying the requirements set forth in Section 100.23,"Geologic and Seismic Siting Criteria," of Title 10, Part 100, of the Code of Federal Regulations (10 CFR Part 100), "Reactor Site Criteria" (Ref. 1).  The NRC staff incorporated developments in ground motion estimation models; updated models for earthquake sources; methods for
represents the first part of the development of the SSE for a site as a characterization of the regional and local seismic hazard.  The final SSE must satisfy both 10 CFR 100.23 and Appendix S, "Earthquake Engineering Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants," to 10 CFR Part 50, "Domestic Licensing of Production and Utilization Facilities" (Ref. 2).In 10 CFR 100.23, paragraph (c), "Geological, Seismological, and Engineering Characteristics,"and paragraph (d), "Geologic and Seismic Siting Factors," require that the geological, seismological, and engineering characteristics of a site and its environs be investigated in sufficient scope and detail to permit an adequate evaluation of the proposed site, provide sufficient information to support evaluations performed to arrive at estimates of the SSE, and permit adequate engineering solutions to actual or potential geologic and seismic effects at the proposed site.  Data on the vibratory ground motion; tectonic and non-tectonic surface deformation; earthquake recurrence rates, fault geometry and slip rates, site foundation material; seismically induced floods and water waves; and other siting factors and design conditions should be obtained by reviewing pertinent literature and carrying out field investigations.


RG 1.208, Page 210 CFR 100.23, paragraph (d)(1), "Determination of the Safe Shutdown Earthquake GroundMotion," requires that uncertainty inherent in estimates of the SSE be addressed through an appropriate analysis, such as a probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA).In Appendix A, "General Design Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants," to 10 CFR Part 50, GeneralDesign Criterion (GDC) 2, "Design Bases for Protection Against Natural Phenomena," requires, in part, that nuclear power plant structures, systems, and components (SSCs) important to safety must be designed to withstand the effects of natural phenomena (such as earthquakes) without loss of capability to perform their safety functions.  Such SSCs must also be designed to accommodate the effects of, and be compatible with, the environmental conditions associated with normal operation and postulated accidents.Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50 specifies, in part, requirements for implementing GDC 2 withrespect to earthquakes.  Paragraph IV(a)(1)(i), of Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50, requires that the SSE
determining site response; and new methods for defining a site-specific, performance-based earthquake
must be characterized by free-field ground motion response spectra at the free ground surface. In view of the limited data available on vibratory ground motions of strong earthquakes, it will usually be appropriate that the design response spectra be smoothed spectra compatible with site characteristics.  In addition, the horizontal motions in the free field at the foundation level of the structures consistent with the SSE must be an appropriate response spectrum with a peak ground acceleration of at least 0.1g.The 10 CFR Part 50 licensing practice required applicants to acquire a construction permit (CP),and then apply for an operating license (OL) during construction. Alternatively, the requirements and procedures applicable to the NRC's issuance of early site permits (ESPs) and combined licenses (COLs)
 
for nuclear power facilities are set forth in Subparts A and C of 10 CFR Part 52, "Licenses, Certifications,and Approvals for Nuclear Power Plants" (Ref. 3), respectively.This regulatory guide has been developed to provide general guidance on methods acceptable tothe NRC staff for (1) conducting geological, geophysical, seismological, and geotechnical investigations;
ground motion that satisfy the requirements of 10 CFR 100.23 and lead to the establishment of the safe
(2) identifying and characterizing seismic sources; (3) conducting a probabilistic seismic hazard assessment (PSHA); (4) determining seismic wave transmission (soil amplification) characteristics of soil and rock sites; and (5) determining a site-specific, performance-based GMRS, satisfying the requirements of paragraphs (c), (d)(1), and (d)(2) of 10 CFR 100.23, and leading to the establishment of an SSE to satisfy the design requirements of Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50.  The steps necessary to develop the final SSE are described in Chapter 3, "Design of Structures, Components, Equipment and Systems," of NUREG-0800, "Standard Review Plan for the Review of Safety Analysis Reports for Nuclear Power Plants" (Ref. 4).  Regulatory Position 5.4 of this guide provides a more detailed description of the development of the final SSE.This regulatory guide contains several appendices that address the objectives stated above. Appendix A contains a list of definitions.  Appendix B contains a list of abbreviations and acronyms.
 
shutdown earthquake ground motion (SSE).  The purpose of this regulatory guide is to provide guidance
 
on the development of the site-specific ground motion response spectrum (GMRS).  The GMRS
 
represents the first part of the development of the SSE for a site as a characterization of the regional and
 
local seismic hazard.  The final SSE must satisfy both 10 CFR 100.23 and Appendix S, "Earthquake
 
Engineering Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants," to 10 CFR Part 50, "Domestic Licensing of Production
 
and Utilization Facilities" (Ref. 2).
In 10 CFR 100.23, paragraph (c), "Geological, Seismological, and Engineering Characteristics,"
and paragraph (d), "Geologic and Seismic Siting Factors," require that the geological, seismological, and
 
engineering characteristics of a site and its environs be investigated in sufficient scope and detail to
 
permit an adequate evaluation of the proposed site, provide sufficient information to support evaluations
 
performed to arrive at estimates of the SSE, and permit adequate engineering solutions to actual or
 
potential geologic and seismic effects at the proposed site.  Data on the vibratory ground motion; tectonic
 
and non-tectonic surface deformation; earthquake recurrence rates, fault geometry and slip rates, site
 
foundation material; seismically induced floods and water waves; and other siting factors and design
 
conditions should be obtained by reviewing pertinent literature and carrying out field investigations.
 
RG 1.208, Page 2
10 CFR 100.23, paragraph (d)(1), "Determination of the Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion," requires that uncertainty inherent in estimates of the SSE be addressed through an appropriate
 
analysis, such as a probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA).
In Appendix A, "General Design Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants," to 10 CFR Part 50, General Design Criterion (GDC) 2, "Design Bases for Protection Against Natural Phenomena," requires, in part, that nuclear power plant structures, systems, and components (SSCs) important to safety must be
 
designed to withstand the effects of natural phenomena (such as earthquakes) without loss of capability
 
to perform their safety functions.  Such SSCs must also be designed to accommodate the effects of, and
 
be compatible with, the environmental conditions associated with normal operation and postulated
 
accidents.
 
Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50 specifies, in part, requirements for implementing GDC 2 with respect to earthquakes.  Paragraph IV(a)(1)(i), of Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50, requires that the SSE
 
must be characterized by free-field ground motion response spectra at the free ground surfac
 
====e. In view of====
 
the limited data available on vibratory ground motions of strong earthquakes, it will usually be
 
appropriate that the design response spectra be smoothed spectra compatible with site characteristics.  In
 
addition, the horizontal motions in the free field at the foundation level of the structures consistent with
 
the SSE must be an appropriate response spectrum with a peak ground acceleration of at least 0.1g.
 
The 10 CFR Part 50 licensing practice required applicants to acquire a construction permit (CP), and then apply for an operating license (OL) during construction. Alternatively, the requirements and
 
procedures applicable to the NRC's issuance of early site permits (ESPs) and combined licenses (COLs)
for nuclear power facilities are set forth in Subparts A and C of 10 CFR Part 52, "Licenses, Certifications, and Approvals for Nuclear Power Plants" (Ref. 3), respectively.
 
This regulatory guide has been developed to provide general guidance on methods acceptable to the NRC staff for (1) conducting geological, geophysical, seismological, and geotechnical investigations;
 
(2) identifying and characterizing seismic sources; (3) conducting a probabilistic seismic hazard
 
assessment (PSHA); (4) determining seismic wave transmission (soil amplification) characteristics of soil
 
and rock sites; and (5) determining a site-specific, performance-based GMRS, satisfying the requirements
 
of paragraphs (c), (d)(1), and (d)(2) of 10 CFR 100.23, and leading to the establishment of an SSE to
 
satisfy the design requirements of Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50.  The steps necessary to develop the
 
final SSE are described in Chapter 3, "Design of Structures, Components, Equipment and Systems," of
 
NUREG-0800, "Standard Review Plan for the Review of Safety Analysis Reports for Nuclear Power
 
Plants" (Ref. 4).  Regulatory Position 5.4 of this guide provides a more detailed description of the
 
development of the final SSE.
 
This regulatory guide contains several appendices that address the objectives stated above.
 
Appendix A contains a list of definitions.  Appendix B contains a list of abbreviations and acronyms.


Appendix C discusses a procedure to characterize site geology, seismology, and geophysic
Appendix C discusses a procedure to characterize site geology, seismology, and geophysic


====s. Appendix D====
====s. Appendix D====
describes the procedure to determine the controlling earthquakes.  Appendix E describes the procedure for determining seismic wave transmission (soil amplification) characteristics of soil and rock sites.


Appendix F provides criteria for developing and evaluating modified ground motions used for soil response analyses.This regulatory guide may address information collections that are covered by the requirementsof 10 CFR Part 50, 10 CFR Part 52, and 10 CFR Part 100, which the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) approved under OMB control numbers 3150-0011, 3150-0151, and 3150-0093, respectively. The NRC may neither conduct nor sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, an information collection request or requirement unless the requesting document displays a currently valid OMB control number.
describes the procedure to determine the controlling earthquakes.  Appendix E describes the procedure
 
for determining seismic wave transmission (soil amplification) characteristics of soil and rock sites.
 
Appendix F provides criteria for developing and evaluating modified ground motions used for soil
 
response analyses.
 
This regulatory guide may address information collections that are covered by the requirements of 10 CFR Part 50, 10 CFR Part 52, and 10 CFR Part 100, which the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) approved under OMB control numbers 3150-0011, 3150-0151, and 3150-0093, respectivel
 
====y.   The====
 
NRC may neither conduct nor sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, an information


1The CEUS and WUS Time History databases are provided in NUREG/CR-6728 (Ref. 6).RG 1.208, Page 3
collection request or requirement unless the requesting document displays a currently valid OMB control
 
number.
 
1The CEUS and WUS Time History databases are provided in NUREG/CR-6728 (Ref. 6).RG 1.208, Page 3  


==B. DISCUSSION==
==B. DISCUSSION==
BackgroundRegulatory Guide 1.165 (Ref. 5) provides general guidance on procedures acceptable to the NRCstaff to satisfy the requirements of 10 CFR 100.23.  This regulatory guide provides alternative guidance that incorporates developments in ground motion estimation models; updated models for earthquake sources; methods for determining site response; and new methods for defining a site-specific, performance-based GMRS.  Therefore, the NRC staff is providing this regulatory guide as an alternative to Regulatory Guide 1.165 (Ref. 5) to satisfy, in part, the requirements of 10 CFR 100.23 and Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50.The general process to determine a site-specific, performance-based GMRS includes thefollowing:(1)site- and region-specific geological, seismological, geophysical, and geotechnical investigations(2)a probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA)
Background Regulatory Guide 1.165 (Ref. 5) provides general guidance on procedures acceptable to the NRC
staff to satisfy the requirements of 10 CFR 100.23.  This regulatory guide provides alternative guidance
 
that incorporates developments in ground motion estimation models; updated models for earthquake
 
sources; methods for determining site response; and new methods for defining a site-specific, performance-based GMRS.  Therefore, the NRC staff is providing this regulatory guide as an alternative
 
to Regulatory Guide 1.165 (Ref. 5) to satisfy, in part, the requirements of 10 CFR 100.23 and Appendix
 
S to 10 CFR Part 50.
 
The general process to determine a site-specific, performance-based GMRS includes the following:(1)site- and region-specific geological, seismological, geophysical, and geotechnical investigations(2)a probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA)
(3)a site response analysis to incorporate the effects of local geology and topography
(3)a site response analysis to incorporate the effects of local geology and topography
(4)the selection of appropriate performance goals and methodologyGeological, seismological, and geophysical investigations are performed to develop an up-to-date, site-specific, earth science database that supports site characterization and a PSHA.  The results of these investigations will also be used to assess whether new data and their interpretation are consistent with the information used in probabilistic seismic hazard studies previously accepted by the NRC.The PSHA is conducted with up-to-date interpretations of earthquake sources, earthquakerecurrence, and strong ground motion estimation.  The site seismic hazard characteristics are quantified by the seismic hazard curves from a PSHA and the uniform hazard response spectra (UHRS) that cover a broad range of natural frequencies.  The hazard curves are developed in part by identifying and characterizing each seismic source in terms of maximum magnitude, magnitude recurrence relationship, and source geometry.  The rock-based ground motion at a site resulting from the combined effect of all sources can then be determined through the use of attenuation relationships.Seismic wave transmission (site amplification) procedures are necessary to obtain appropriateUHRS at the free-field ground surface if the shear wave velocity of the surficial material is less than the generic rock conditions appropriate for the rock-based attenuation relationships used in the PSHA.  A
(4)the selection of appropriate performance goals and methodology Geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations are performed to develop an up-to- date, site-specific, earth science database that supports site characterization and a PSHA.  The results of
database of earthquake time histories on rock for both the central and eastern United States (CEUS) and the western United States (WUS) has been developed to determine the dynamic site response for the soil or rock site conditions.1  
 
2The reference probability is computed as the median probability obtained from the distribution of median probabilitiesof exceeding the SSE at 29 sites in the CEUS.  The sites selected were intended to represent relatively recent (to the study) designs that used the Regulatory Guide 1.60 (Ref. 8), design response spectrum, or similar spectrum, as their design bases.  The use of the reference probability ensures an adequate level of conservatism in determining the SSEconsistent with recent licensing decisions.3The PF, RP, and HD criteria corresponding to Seismic Design Category (SDC) 5 in Reference 7 (which are equivalent tonuclear power plant requirements) are used.RG 1.208, Page 4A performance-based approach is described in Chapters 1 and 2 of ASCE/SEI Standard 43-05(Ref. 7), instead of the reference probability approach described in Appendix B to Regulatory Guide
these investigations will also be used to assess whether new data and their interpretation are consistent
1.165 (Ref. 5).2  The performance-based approach employs Target Performance Goal (PF), ProbabilityRatio (RP), and Hazard Exceedance Probability (HD) criteria3 to ensure that nuclear power plants canwithstand the effects of earthquakes with a desired performance, the desired performance being expressed as the target value of 1 E-05 for the mean annual probability of exceedance (frequency) of the onset of significant inelastic deformation (FOSID).  This approach targets a performance criteria for SSCs which is defined relative to the onset of inelastic deformation; instead of relative to the occurrence of failure of the SSC.  The mean annual probability of exceedance associated with this performance target was chosen based on this performance criterion.One of the objectives in developing the performance-based GMRS is to achieve approximatelyconsistent performance for SSCs, across a range of seismic environments, annual probabilities, and structural frequencies.  The intent is to develop a site-specific GMRS that achieves the PF that ensuresthat the performance of the SSCs related to safety and radiological protection is acceptable.Basis for Regulatory PositionsSite- and Region-Specific Investigations to Characterize Site Geology, Seismology, and GeophysicsThe primary objective of geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations is to developan up-to-date, site-specific earth science database that supports site characterization and a PSHA.  The results of these investigations will also be used to assess whether new data and their interpretation are consistent with the most recent information used in probabilistic seismic hazard studies accepted by the NRC.  If the new data, such as new seismic sources and new ground motion attenuation relationships, are consistent with the existing earth science database, updating or modification of information used in the hazard analysis is not required.  It will be necessary to update seismic sources and ground motion attenuation relationships for sites where there is significant new information resulting from the site investigations.Features Discovered During ConstructionIt should be demonstrated that deformation features discovered during construction (particularlyfaults, potential soft zones, or other features of engineering significance) do not have the potential to compromise the safety of the plant.  Applying the combined licensing procedure to a site could result in issuing a license prior to the start of construction.  During the construction of nuclear power plants licensed in the past, previously unknown faults were often discovered in site excavations. Before issuance of the OL, it was necessary to demonstrate that faults exposed in the excavation posed no hazard to the facility.  Under the combined license procedure, these kinds of features should be mapped and assessed as to their rupture and ground motion generating potential while the excavations' walls and bases are exposed, and the NRC staff should be notified when excavations are open for inspection.
 
with the information used in probabilistic seismic hazard studies previously accepted by the NRC.
 
The PSHA is conducted with up-to-date interpretations of earthquake sources, earthquake recurrence, and strong ground motion estimation.  The site seismic hazard characteristics are quantified
 
by the seismic hazard curves from a PSHA and the uniform hazard response spectra (UHRS) that cover a
 
broad range of natural frequencies.  The hazard curves are developed in part by identifying and
 
characterizing each seismic source in terms of maximum magnitude, magnitude recurrence relationship, and source geometry.  The rock-based ground motion at a site resulting from the combined effect of all
 
sources can then be determined through the use of attenuation relationships.
 
Seismic wave transmission (site amplification) procedures are necessary to obtain appropriate UHRS at the free-field ground surface if the shear wave velocity of the surficial material is less than the
 
generic rock conditions appropriate for the rock-based attenuation relationships used in the PSHA.  A
 
database of earthquake time histories on rock for both the central and eastern United States (CEUS) and
 
the western United States (WUS) has been developed to determine the dynamic site response for the soil
 
or rock site conditions.
 
1  
2The reference probability is computed as the median probability obtained from the distribution of median probabilitiesof exceeding the SSE at 29 sites in the CEUS.  The sites selected were intended to represent relatively recent (to the study) designs that used the Regulatory Guide 1.60 (Ref. 8), design response spectrum, or similar spectrum, as their design bases.  The use of the reference probability ensures an adequate level of conservatism in determining the SSEconsistent with recent licensing decisions.
 
3The P F , R P, and H D criteria corresponding to Seismic Design Category (SDC) 5 in Reference 7 (which are equivalent tonuclear power plant requirements) are used.RG 1.208, Page 4 A performance-based approach is described in Chapters 1 and 2 of ASCE/SEI Standard 43-05 (Ref. 7), instead of the reference probability approach described in Appendix B to Regulatory Guide
 
1.165 (Ref. 5).
2  The performance-based approach employs Target Performance Goal (P
F), Probability Ratio (R P), and Hazard Exceedance Probability (H
D) criteria
3 to ensure that nuclear power plants can withstand the effects of earthquakes with a desired performance, the desired performance being
 
expressed as the target value of 1 E-05 for the mean annual probability of exceedance (frequency) of the
 
onset of significant inelastic deformation (FOSID).  This approach targets a performance criteria for
 
SSCs which is defined relative to the onset of inelastic deformation; instead of relative to the occurrence
 
of failure of the SSC.  The mean annual probability of exceedance associated with this performance
 
target was chosen based on this performance criterion.
 
One of the objectives in developing the performance-based GMRS is to achieve approximately consistent performance for SSCs, across a range of seismic environments, annual probabilities, and
 
structural frequencies.  The intent is to develop a site-specific GMRS that achieves the P
F that ensures that the performance of the SSCs related to safety and radiological protection is acceptable.
 
Basis for Regulatory Positions Site- and Region-Specific Investigations to Characterize Site Geology, Seismology, and Geophysics The primary objective of geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations is to develop an up-to-date, site-specific earth science database that supports site characterization and a PSHA.  The
 
results of these investigations will also be used to assess whether new data and their interpretation are
 
consistent with the most recent information used in probabilistic seismic hazard studies accepted by the
 
NRC.  If the new data, such as new seismic sources and new ground motion attenuation relationships, are
 
consistent with the existing earth science database, updating or modification of information used in the
 
hazard analysis is not required.  It will be necessary to update seismic sources and ground motion
 
attenuation relationships for sites where there is significant new information resulting from the site
 
investigations.
 
Features Discovered During Construction It should be demonstrated that deformation features discovered during construction (particularly faults, potential soft zones, or other features of engineering significance) do not have the potential to
 
compromise the safety of the plant.  Applying the combined licensing procedure to a site could result in
 
issuing a license prior to the start of construction.  During the construction of nuclear power plants
 
licensed in the past, previously unknown faults were often discovered in site excavation
 
====s. Before====
 
issuance of the OL, it was necessary to demonstrate that faults exposed in the excavation posed no hazard
 
to the facility.  Under the combined license procedure, these kinds of features should be mapped and
 
assessed as to their rupture and ground motion generating potential while the excavations' walls and
 
bases are exposed, and the NRC staff should be notified when excavations are open for inspection.
 
RG 1.208, Page 5 Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis Methods A PSHA has been identified in 10 CFR 100.23 as a means to address the uncertainties in the determination of the SSE.  Furthermore, the rule recognizes that the nature of uncertainty and the


RG 1.208, Page 5Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis MethodsA PSHA has been identified in 10 CFR 100.23 as a means to address the uncertainties in thedetermination of the SSE.  Furthermore, the rule recognizes that the nature of uncertainty and the appropriate approach to account for uncertainties depend on the tectonic setting of the site and on properly characterizing input parameters to the PSHA, such as the seismic source characteristics, the recurrence of earthquakes within a seismic source, the maximum magnitude of earthquakes within a seismic source, and engineering estimation of earthquake ground motion through attenuation relationships.Every site is unique; therefore, requirements for analyses and investigations vary.  It is notpossible to provide procedures for addressing all situations.  In cases that are not specifically addressed in this regulatory guide, prudent and sound engineering judgment should be exercised.Probabilistic procedures were developed specifically for nuclear power plant seismic hazardassessments in the CEUS, also referred to as the Stable Continent Region (SCR).  Experience has been gained by applying this methodology at nuclear facility sites, both reactor and non-reactor sites, throughout the United States.  The experience with these applications also served as the basis for the guidelines for conducting a PSHA in Reference 9.  The guidelines detailed in Reference 9 should be incorporated into the PSHA process to the extent possible.  These procedures provide a structured approach for decision making with respect to site-specific investigations.  A PSHA provides a framework to address the uncertainties associated with the identification and characterization of seismic sources by incorporating multiple interpretations of seismological parameters.  A PSHA also provides a means for evaluation of the likelihood of SSE occurrence during the design lifetime of a given facility, given the recurrence interval and recurrence pattern of earthquakes in pertinent seismic sources.  Within the framework of a probabilistic analysis, uncertainties in the characterization of seismic sources and ground motions are identified and incorporated in the procedure at each step of the process for estimating the GMRS.  The role of geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations is to develop geoscience information about the site for use in the detailed design analysis of the facility, as well as to ensure that the seismic hazard analysis is based on up-to-date information.Experience in performing seismic hazard evaluations in active plate-margin regions in the WUS(for example, the San Gregorio-Hosgri fault zone and the Cascadia Subduction Zone) has also identified uncertainties associated with the characterization of seismic sources (Refs. 10-12).  Sources of uncertainty include fault geometry, rupture segmentation, rupture extent, seismic-activity rate, ground motion, and earthquake occurrence modeling.  As is the case for sites in the CEUS, alternative hypotheses and parameters must be considered to account for these uncertainties.Uncertainties associated with the identification and characterization of seismic sources intectonic environments in both the CEUS and the WUS should be evaluated.  While the most recent characterization of any seismic source accepted by the NRC staff can be used as a starting point for analysis of a new facility, any new information related to a seismic source that impacts the hazard calculations must be evaluated and incorporated into the PSHA as appropriate based on the technical information available.
appropriate approach to account for uncertainties depend on the tectonic setting of the site and on


RG 1.208, Page 6Central and Eastern United StatesThe CEUS is considered to be that part of the United States east of the Rocky Mountain front, oreast of Longitude 105 West (Refs. 13, 14).  A PSHA in the CEUS must account for credible alternativeseismic source models through the use of a decision tree with appropriate weighting factors that are based on the most up-to-date information and relative confidence in alternative characterizations for each seismic source.  Seismic sources identified and characterized by the Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory (LLNL) (Refs. 13-15) and the Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) (Refs. 16, 17) were used for studies in the CEUS in the past.  In addition to the LLNL and EPRI resources, the United States Geological Survey also maintains a large database of seismic sources for both the CEUS and the WUS.
properly characterizing input parameters to the PSHA, such as the seismic source characteristics, the


The characterization of specific seismic sources found in these databases may still represent the latest information available at the time that a PSHA is to be undertaken.  However, if more up-to-date information is available, it should be incorporated.In the CEUS, characterization of seismic sources is more problematic than in active plate-marginregions because there is generally no clear association between seismicity and known tectonic structures or near-surface geology.  In general, the observed geologic structures are a result of response to tectonic forces that may have little or no correlation with current tectonic forces.  Therefore, it is important to account for this uncertainty by the use of multiple alternative source models.The identification of seismic sources and reasonable alternatives in the CEUS considershypotheses currently advocated for the occurrence of earthquakes in the CEUS (e.g., the reactivation of favorably oriented zones of weakness or the local amplification and release of stresses concentrated around a geologic structure).  In tectonically active areas of the CEUS, such as the New Madrid Seismic Zone, where geological, seismological, and geophysical evidence suggest the nature of the sources that generate the earthquakes, it may be more appropriate to characterize those seismic sources by using procedures similar to those normally applied in the WUS.Western United StatesThe WUS is considered to be that part of the United States that lies west of the Rocky Mountainfront, or west of approximately 105 West Longitude.  In some regions of the WUS, significant researchinto seismic sources is ongoing and the results of this research should be evaluated and addressed.The active plate-margin regions include, for example, coastal California, Oregon, Washington,and Alaska.  For the active plate-margin regions, where earthquakes can often be correlated with known faults that have experienced repeated movements at or near the ground surface during the Quaternary, tectonic structures should be assessed for their earthquake and surface deformation potential. In these regions, at least three types of sources may exist:(1)faults that are known to be at or near the surface(2)buried (blind) sources that may often be manifested as folds at the earth's surface
recurrence of earthquakes within a seismic source, the maximum magnitude of earthquakes within a
(3)subduction zone sources, such as those in the Pacific Northwest and AlaskaThe nature of surface faults can be evaluated by conventional surface and near-surfaceinvestigation techniques to assess orientation, geometry, sense of displacements, length of rupture, Quaternary history, etc.  Possibilities of multiple ruptures should be considered, as appropriate.Buried (blind) faults are often associated with surficial deformation such as folding, uplift, orsubsidence.  The surface expression of blind faulting can be detected by mapping the uplifted or down- dropped geomorphological features or stratigraphy, survey leveling, and geodetic methods. The nature of the structure at depth can often be evaluated by deep core borings and geophysical techniques.
 
seismic source, and engineering estimation of earthquake ground motion through attenuation
 
relationships.
 
Every site is unique; therefore, requirements for analyses and investigations vary.  It is not possible to provide procedures for addressing all situations.  In cases that are not specifically addressed
 
in this regulatory guide, prudent and sound engineering judgment should be exercised.
 
Probabilistic procedures were developed specifically for nuclear power plant seismic hazard assessments in the CEUS, also referred to as the Stable Continent Region (SCR).  Experience has been
 
gained by applying this methodology at nuclear facility sites, both reactor and non-reactor sites, throughout the United States.  The experience with these applications also served as the basis for the
 
guidelines for conducting a PSHA in Reference 9.  The guidelines detailed in Reference 9 should be
 
incorporated into the PSHA process to the extent possible.  These procedures provide a structured
 
approach for decision making with respect to site-specific investigations.  A PSHA provides a framework
 
to address the uncertainties associated with the identification and characterization of seismic sources by
 
incorporating multiple interpretations of seismological parameters.  A PSHA also provides a means for
 
evaluation of the likelihood of SSE occurrence during the design lifetime of a given facility, given the
 
recurrence interval and recurrence pattern of earthquakes in pertinent seismic source
 
====s. Within the====
 
framework of a probabilistic analysis, uncertainties in the characterization of seismic sources and ground
 
motions are identified and incorporated in the procedure at each step of the process for estimating the
 
GMRS.  The role of geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations is to develop geoscience
 
information about the site for use in the detailed design analysis of the facility, as well as to ensure that
 
the seismic hazard analysis is based on up-to-date information.
 
Experience in performing seismic hazard evaluations in active plate-margin regions in the WUS (for example, the San Gregorio-Hosgri fault zone and the Cascadia Subduction Zone) has also identified
 
uncertainties associated with the characterization of seismic sources (Refs. 10-12).  Sources of
 
uncertainty include fault geometry, rupture segmentation, rupture extent, seismic-activity rate, ground
 
motion, and earthquake occurrence modeling.  As is the case for sites in the CEUS, alternative
 
hypotheses and parameters must be considered to account for these uncertainties.
 
Uncertainties associated with the identification and characterization of seismic sources in tectonic environments in both the CEUS and the WUS should be evaluated.  While the most recent
 
characterization of any seismic source accepted by the NRC staff can be used as a starting point for
 
analysis of a new facility, any new information related to a seismic source that impacts the hazard
 
calculations must be evaluated and incorporated into the PSHA as appropriate based on the technical
 
information available.
 
RG 1.208, Page 6 Central and Eastern United States The CEUS is considered to be that part of the United States east of the Rocky Mountain front, or east of Longitude 105 West (Refs. 13, 14).  A PSHA in the CEUS must account for credible alternative seismic source models through the use of a decision tree with appropriate weighting factors that are
 
based on the most up-to-date information and relative confidence in alternative characterizations for each
 
seismic source.  Seismic sources identified and characterized by the Lawrence Livermore National
 
Laboratory (LLNL) (Refs. 13-15) and the Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) (Refs. 16, 17) were
 
used for studies in the CEUS in the past.  In addition to the LLNL and EPRI resources, the United States
 
Geological Survey also maintains a large database of seismic sources for both the CEUS and the WUS.
 
The characterization of specific seismic sources found in these databases may still represent the latest
 
information available at the time that a PSHA is to be undertaken.  However, if more up-to-date
 
information is available, it should be incorporated.
 
In the CEUS, characterization of seismic sources is more problematic than in active plate-margin regions because there is generally no clear association between seismicity and known tectonic structures
 
or near-surface geology.  In general, the observed geologic structures are a result of response to tectonic
 
forces that may have little or no correlation with current tectonic forces.  Therefore, it is important to
 
account for this uncertainty by the use of multiple alternative source models.
 
The identification of seismic sources and reasonable alternatives in the CEUS considers hypotheses currently advocated for the occurrence of earthquakes in the CEUS (e.g., the reactivation of
 
favorably oriented zones of weakness or the local amplification and release of stresses concentrated
 
around a geologic structure).  In tectonically active areas of the CEUS, such as the New Madrid Seismic
 
Zone, where geological, seismological, and geophysical evidence suggest the nature of the sources that
 
generate the earthquakes, it may be more appropriate to characterize those seismic sources by using
 
procedures similar to those normally applied in the WUS.
 
Western United States The WUS is considered to be that part of the United States that lies west of the Rocky Mountain front, or west of approximately 105 West Longitude.  In some regions of the WUS, significant research into seismic sources is ongoing and the results of this research should be evaluated and addressed.
 
The active plate-margin regions include, for example, coastal California, Oregon, Washington, and Alaska.  For the active plate-margin regions, where earthquakes can often be correlated with known
 
faults that have experienced repeated movements at or near the ground surface during the Quaternary, tectonic structures should be assessed for their earthquake and surface deformation potentia
 
====l. In these====
 
regions, at least three types of sources may exist:(1)faults that are known to be at or near the surface(2)buried (blind) sources that may often be manifested as folds at the earth's surface
(3)subduction zone sources, such as those in the Pacific Northwest and Alaska The nature of surface faults can be evaluated by conventional surface and near-surface investigation techniques to assess orientation, geometry, sense of displacements, length of rupture, Quaternary history, etc.  Possibilities of multiple ruptures should be considered, as appropriate.
 
Buried (blind) faults are often associated with surficial deformation such as folding, uplift, or subsidence.  The surface expression of blind faulting can be detected by mapping the uplifted or down-
 
dropped geomorphological features or stratigraphy, survey leveling, and geodetic method
 
====s. The nature of====
 
the structure at depth can often be evaluated by deep core borings and geophysical techniques.
 
RG 1.208, Page 7 Continental U.S. subduction zones are located in the Pacific Northwest and Alaska.  Seismic sources associated with subduction zones are sources within the overriding plate, on the interface
 
between the subducting and overriding lithospheric plates, and in the interior of the downgoing oceanic
 
slab.  The characterization of subduction zone seismic sources should consider the three-dimensional
 
geometry of the subducting plate, rupture segmentation of subduction zones, geometry of historical
 
ruptures, constraints on the up-dip and down-dip extent of rupture, and comparisons with other
 
subducting plates worldwide.
 
The Basin and Range region of the WUS, and to a lesser extent the Pacific Northwest and the central United States, exhibit temporal clustering of earthquakes.  Temporal clustering is best
 
exemplified by the rupture histories within the Wasatch fault zone in Utah, where several large, late
 
Holocene coseismic faulting events occurred at relatively close intervals (for hundreds to thousands of
 
years) that were preceded by long periods of quiescence that lasted thousands to tens of thousands of
 
years.  Temporal clustering should be considered in these regions, or wherever paleoseismic evidence
 
indicates that it has occurred.
 
Ground motion attenuation relationships for the WUS are also continually being developed and revised.  Significant effort has been undertaken by the Pacific Earthquake Engineering Research Center's
 
Lifelines program to develop Next Generation Attenuation (NGA) relationships for shallow crustal
 
earthquakes in active tectonic regions based on the large database of earthquake recordings now available
 
for this tectonic setting.  The suitability of the NGA relationships or other WUS relationships for a
 
particular site will be evaluated on a case-by-case basis.
 
Lower-Bound Magnitude Cutoff Current seismic hazard analysis methods generally utilize a lower-bound body wave magnitude cut-off value for earthquakes to be included in the PSHA.  This lower-bound magnitude cut-off level is a
 
conservatively defined value based on research studies whose objective was to estimate the damage
 
potential of smaller earthquakes.  Reference 18 establishes an appropriate distribution of low-magnitude
 
earthquakes in the seismic hazard analysis through the use of the cumulative absolute velocity (CAV)
 
model, in place of a lower-bound magnitude cutoff.
 
Several ground motion measures such as peak ground acceleration, Arias intensity, root mean square acceleration, and CAV were evaluated to determine the single ground motion measure that is best
 
correlated with the threshold of potential damage.  The CAV was determined to be the best parameter
 
correlating damage with the Modified Mercalli Intensity Scale, and a CAV value of 0.16 g-sec was found
 
to be a conservative characterization of the threshold between damaging and non-damaging earthquake
 
motions for buildings of good design and construction.  An empirical model for estimating CAV in terms
 
of magnitude, peak ground acceleration (PGA), and duration is needed because the PSHA calculation
 
does not use time histories directly.
 
Spectral Frequency Range Considered in the Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analyses The frequency range considered in the PSHA should extend from a low frequency that can be reliably obtained from the current strong-motion data set from the WUS, principally California, to a high-
 
frequency limit that permits the ratio of spectral acceleration to PGA to reach nearly 1 for hard rock site
 
conditions.  For the CEUS this high-frequency limit is approximately 100 Hz.  For soft rock conditions, the ratio of spectral acceleration to PGA will reach 1 at about 40-50 Hz.  To obtain a smooth plot of
 
spectral response across the frequency range of interest, the hazard assessment should be provided for a
 
minimum of 30 frequencies, approximately equally spaced on a logarithmic frequency axis between 100


RG 1.208, Page 7Continental U.S. subduction zones are located in the Pacific Northwest and Alaska.  Seismicsources associated with subduction zones are sources within the overriding plate, on the interface between the subducting and overriding lithospheric plates, and in the interior of the downgoing oceanic slab.  The characterization of subduction zone seismic sources should consider the three-dimensional geometry of the subducting plate, rupture segmentation of subduction zones, geometry of historical ruptures, constraints on the up-dip and down-dip extent of rupture, and comparisons with other subducting plates worldwide.The Basin and Range region of the WUS, and to a lesser extent the Pacific Northwest and thecentral United States, exhibit temporal clustering of earthquakes.  Temporal clustering is best exemplified by the rupture histories within the Wasatch fault zone in Utah, where several large, late Holocene coseismic faulting events occurred at relatively close intervals (for hundreds to thousands of years) that were preceded by long periods of quiescence that lasted thousands to tens of thousands of years.  Temporal clustering should be considered in these regions, or wherever paleoseismic evidence indicates that it has occurred.Ground motion attenuation relationships for the WUS are also continually being developed andrevised.  Significant effort has been undertaken by the Pacific Earthquake Engineering Research Center's Lifelines program to develop Next Generation Attenuation (NGA) relationships for shallow crustal earthquakes in active tectonic regions based on the large database of earthquake recordings now available for this tectonic setting.  The suitability of the NGA relationships or other WUS relationships for a particular site will be evaluated on a case-by-case basis.Lower-Bound Magnitude CutoffCurrent seismic hazard analysis methods generally utilize a lower-bound body wave magnitudecut-off value for earthquakes to be included in the PSHA.  This lower-bound magnitude cut-off level is a conservatively defined value based on research studies whose objective was to estimate the damage potential of smaller earthquakes.  Reference 18 establishes an appropriate distribution of low-magnitude earthquakes in the seismic hazard analysis through the use of the cumulative absolute velocity (CAV)
model, in place of a lower-bound magnitude cutoff.Several ground motion measures such as peak ground acceleration, Arias intensity, root meansquare acceleration, and CAV were evaluated to determine the single ground motion measure that is best correlated with the threshold of potential damage.  The CAV was determined to be the best parameter correlating damage with the Modified Mercalli Intensity Scale, and a CAV value of 0.16 g-sec was found to be a conservative characterization of the threshold between damaging and non-damaging earthquake motions for buildings of good design and construction.  An empirical model for estimating CAV in terms of magnitude, peak ground acceleration (PGA), and duration is needed because the PSHA calculation does not use time histories directly.Spectral Frequency Range Considered in the Probabilistic Seismic Hazard AnalysesThe frequency range considered in the PSHA should extend from a low frequency that can bereliably obtained from the current strong-motion data set from the WUS, principally California, to a high- frequency limit that permits the ratio of spectral acceleration to PGA to reach nearly 1 for hard rock site conditions.  For the CEUS this high-frequency limit is approximately 100 Hz.  For soft rock conditions, the ratio of spectral acceleration to PGA will reach 1 at about 40-50 Hz.  To obtain a smooth plot of spectral response across the frequency range of interest, the hazard assessment should be provided for a minimum of 30 frequencies, approximately equally spaced on a logarithmic frequency axis between 100
and 0.1 Hz.
and 0.1 Hz.


RG 1.208, Page 8Deaggregation of Mean HazardDeaggregation provides information useful for review of the PSHA and insight into the seismicsources that most impact the hazard at a particular site.  It can also be used to determine the controlling earthquakes (i.e., magnitudes and distances) which can be used to perform dynamic site response analyses.Analysis of multiple ground motion levels are used to obtain a more complete understanding ofthe earthquake characteristics (i.e., mean magnitudes and distances) that contribute to the high-frequency
RG 1.208, Page 8 Deaggregation of Mean Hazard Deaggregation provides information useful for review of the PSHA and insight into the seismic sources that most impact the hazard at a particular site.  It can also be used to determine the controlling
(5 and 10 Hz) and low-frequency (1 and 2.5 Hz) hazard, than could be obtained from a single ground motion level (e.g., 1 E-05/yr).Choice of Epsilon in Probabilistic Seismic Hazard AnalysesEpsilon, the number of standard deviations included in defining the distribution of groundmotions for each magnitude and distance scenario, can have a significant impact on the results of the PSHA.  Care should be taken in choosing a value for epsilon large enough such that natural aleatory variability in ground motions is adequately addressed.  A study conducted by EPRI and the U.S.


Department of Energy (DOE) (Ref. 19) found no technical basis for truncating the ground motion distribution at a specified number of standard deviations (epsilons) below that implied by the strength of the geologic materials. Even though very large ground motions may have a low probability of occurrence, when the hazard is calculated for low annual frequencies of exceedance, low probability events need to be considered.Site Response AnalysisFor rock or soil sites where the free-field ground surface shear wave velocity is less than thegeneric rock conditions defined by the attenuation relationships used in the PSHA, seismic wave transmission (site amplification) procedures should be used to obtain appropriate UHRS at the free-field ground surface.  Earthquake time histories and time-domain procedures are one method that may be used to determine the dynamic site response for the soil or rock site conditions.  When using this method, enough earthquake time history records should be used to get consistent mean results.  Reference 6 contains a database of recorded time histories on rock for both the CEUS and WUS that can be used as seed records for input time histories for analyses.  The records provided in Reference 6 should be used consistently with the recommendations for use in Reference 6 (e.g., the records were developed to be used as seed motions for spectral matching programs, rather than to be used directly).  The database is divided into magnitude and distance bins, with each bin having a minimum of 15, three-component (two horizontal and one vertical) sets.
earthquakes (i.e., magnitudes and distances) which can be used to perform dynamic site response


RG 1.208, Page 9Performance-Based MethodA performance-based approach is described in Chapters 1 and 2 of ASCE/SEI Standard 43-05(Standard) (Ref. 7).  The Standard was developed to provide performance-based criteria for the seismic design of safety-related SSCs for use in nuclear facilities, covering a broad range of facilities that process, store, or handle radioactive materials.  The goal of the Standard is to present seismic design criteria using a graded approach commensurate with the relative importance to safety and safeguards, which will ensure that nuclear facilities can withstand the effects of earthquakes with desired performance.  The performance-based approach used for this regulatory guide is based on the premise that the seismic demand and structural capacity evaluation criteria laid out by the NRC's Standard Review Plan (SRP) (NUREG-0800) ensure sufficient conservatism to reasonably achieve both of the following:(1)less than about a 1% probability of unacceptable performance for the site-specific responsespectrum ground motion(2)less than about a 10% probability of unacceptable performance for a ground motion equal to150% of the site-specific response spectrum ground motionThe Standard, for the most demanding seismic design category (SDC 5), recommends using a PF= 1 E-05 for the FOSID, RP = 10, and HD = 1 E-04 for the minimum structural damage state, which isdescribed as essentially elastic behavior. Specifically, essentially elastic behavior means that localized inelasticity might occur at stress concentration points, but the overall seismic response will be essentially elastic.The performance-based approach combines a conservative characterization of ground motionhazard with equipment/structure performance (fragility characteristics) to establish risk-consistent GMRS, rather than only hazard-consistent ground shaking, as occurs using the hazard reference probability approach in Appendix B to Regulatory Guide 1.165 (Ref. 5).  The performance target (the mean annual probability of SSCs reaching the limit state of inelastic response) results from the modification of the UHRS at the free-field ground surface by a design factor to obtain the performance- based site-specific GMRS.  The design factor achieves a relatively consistent annual probability of plant component failure across the range of plant locations and structural frequencies.  It does this by accounting for the slope of the seismic hazard curve, which changes with structural frequency and site location.  The design factor ensures that the site-specific response spectrum is equal to or greater than the mean 1 E-04 UHRS.The flow chart in Figure 1 depicts the procedures described in this regulatory guide.
analyses.Analysis of multiple ground motion levels are used to obtain a more complete understanding of the earthquake characteristics (i.e., mean magnitudes and distances) that contribute to the high-frequency


RG 1.208, Page 10Geological, Geophysical, Seismological, andGeotechnical InvestigationsRegulatory Position 1Appendix CSeismic Sources Significant to theSite Seismic HazardRegulatory Position 2Appendix CProbabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis(PSHA) ProceduresRegulatory Position 3Deaggregation of Mean HazardRegulatory Position 3.5Appendix DSeismic Wave Transmission(Soil Amplification) Characteristics of the SiteRegulatory Position 4Appendices E & FPerformance-Based Site-Specific EarthquakeGround Motion ProcedureRegulatory Position 5Figure 1.  Flow Diagram RG 1.208, Page 11
(5 and 10 Hz) and low-frequency (1 and 2.5 Hz) hazard, than could be obtained from a single ground
 
motion level (e.g., 1 E-05/yr).
Choice of Epsilon in Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analyses Epsilon, the number of standard deviations included in defining the distribution of ground motions for each magnitude and distance scenario, can have a significant impact on the results of the
 
PSHA.  Care should be taken in choosing a value for epsilon large enough such that natural aleatory
 
variability in ground motions is adequately addressed.  A study conducted by EPRI and the U.S.
 
Department of Energy (DOE) (Ref. 19) found no technical basis for truncating the ground motion
 
distribution at a specified number of standard deviations (epsilons) below that implied by the strength of
 
the geologic materials.  Even though very large ground motions may have a low probability of
 
occurrence, when the hazard is calculated for low annual frequencies of exceedance, low probability
 
events need to be considered.
 
Site Response Analysis For rock or soil sites where the free-field ground surface shear wave velocity is less than the generic rock conditions defined by the attenuation relationships used in the PSHA, seismic wave
 
transmission (site amplification) procedures should be used to obtain appropriate UHRS at the free-field
 
ground surface.  Earthquake time histories and time-domain procedures are one method that may be used
 
to determine the dynamic site response for the soil or rock site conditions.  When using this method, enough earthquake time history records should be used to get consistent mean results.  Reference 6
 
contains a database of recorded time histories on rock for both the CEUS and WUS that can be used as
 
seed records for input time histories for analyses.  The records provided in Reference 6 should be used
 
consistently with the recommendations for use in Reference 6 (e.g., the records were developed to be
 
used as seed motions for spectral matching programs, rather than to be used directly).  The database is
 
divided into magnitude and distance bins, with each bin having a minimum of 15, three-component (two
 
horizontal and one vertical) sets.
 
RG 1.208, Page 9 Performance-Based Method A performance-based approach is described in Chapters 1 and 2 of ASCE/SEI Standard 43-05 (Standard) (Ref. 7).  The Standard was developed to provide performance-based criteria for the seismic
 
design of safety-related SSCs for use in nuclear facilities, covering a broad range of facilities that
 
process, store, or handle radioactive materials.  The goal of the Standard is to present seismic design
 
criteria using a graded approach commensurate with the relative importance to safety and safeguards, which will ensure that nuclear facilities can withstand the effects of earthquakes with desired
 
performance.  The performance-based approach used for this regulatory guide is based on the premise
 
that the seismic demand and structural capacity evaluation criteria laid out by the NRC's Standard
 
Review Plan (SRP) (NUREG-0800) ensure sufficient conservatism to reasonably achieve both of the
 
following:(1)less than about a 1% probability of unacceptable performance for the site-specific response spectrum ground motion(2)less than about a 10% probability of unacceptable performance for a ground motion equal to
150% of the site-specific response spectrum ground motion The Standard, for the most demanding seismic design category (SDC 5), recommends using a P
F= 1 E-05 for the FOSID, R
P = 10, and H
D = 1 E-04 for the minimum structural damage state, which is described as essentially elastic behavior.  Specifically, essentially elastic behavior means that localized
 
inelasticity might occur at stress concentration points, but the overall seismic response will be essentially
 
elastic.The performance-based approach combines a conservative characterization of ground motion hazard with equipment/structure performance (fragility characteristics) to establish risk-consistent
 
GMRS, rather than only hazard-consistent ground shaking, as occurs using the hazard reference
 
probability approach in Appendix B to Regulatory Guide 1.165 (Ref. 5).  The performance target (the
 
mean annual probability of SSCs reaching the limit state of inelastic response) results from the
 
modification of the UHRS at the free-field ground surface by a design factor to obtain the performance-
 
based site-specific GMRS.  The design factor achieves a relatively consistent annual probability of plant
 
component failure across the range of plant locations and structural frequencie
 
====s. It does this by====
 
accounting for the slope of the seismic hazard curve, which changes with structural frequency and site
 
location.  The design factor ensures that the site-specific response spectrum is equal to or greater than the
 
mean 1 E-04 UHRS.
 
The flow chart in Figure 1 depicts the procedures described in this regulatory guide.
 
RG 1.208, Page 10
Geological, Geophysical, Seismological, and Geotechnical InvestigationsRegulatory Position 1Appendix C
Seismic Sources Significant to the Site Seismic HazardRegulatory Position 2Appendix C
Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis (PSHA) Procedures Regulatory Position 3 Deaggregation of Mean HazardRegulatory Position 3.5Appendix D
Seismic Wave Transmission (Soil Amplification) Characteristics of the SiteRegulatory Position 4Appendices E & F
Performance-Based Site-Specific Earthquake Ground Motion Procedure Regulatory Position 5 Figure 1.  Flow Diagram RG 1.208, Page 11  


==C. REGULATORY POSITION==
==C. REGULATORY POSITION==
1.Geological, Geophysical, Seismological, and Geotechnical Investigations1.1Comprehensive Site Area and Region InvestigationsComprehensive geological, seismological, geophysical, and geotechnical engineeringinvestigations of the site area and region should be performed.  For existing nuclear power plant sites where additional units are planned, the geosciences technical information originally used to validate those sites may need to be updated.  Depending on (1) how much new or additional information has become available since the initial investigations and analyses were performed, and (2) the complexity of the site and regional geology and seismology, additional data may be required. This technical information should be used, along with all other available information, to plan and determine the scope of additional investigations.  The investigations described in this regulatory guide are performed primarily to gather information needed to confirm the suitability of the site and to gather data pertinent to the safe design and construction of the nuclear power plant.  Appropriate geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations are described in Appendix C to this regulatory guide. Geotechnical investigations are described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. 20).  Another important purpose for the site- specific investigations is to determine whether there are any new data or interpretations that are not adequately incorporated into the existing PSHA databases.  Appendix C also describes a method for assessing the impact of new information, obtained during the site-specific investigations on the databases used for the PSHA.These investigations should be performed at four levels, with the degree of detail based on (1)distance from the site, (2) the nature of the Quaternary tectonic regime, (3) the geological complexity of the site and region, (4) the existence of potential seismic sources, and (5) the potential for surface deformations, etc.  A more detailed discussion of the areas and levels of investigations and the bases for them are presented in Appendix C to this regulatory guide.  General guidelines for the levels of investigation are characterized as follows.1.1.1Within a Radius of 320 Kilometers (200 mi) of the Site (Site Region)Conduct regional geological and seismological investigations to identify seismic sources.  Theseinvestigations should include literature reviews, the study of maps and remote sensing data and, if necessary, onsite ground-truth reconnaissance.1.1.2Within a Radius of 40 Kilometers (25 mi) of the Site (Site Vicinity)Geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations should be carried out in greater detailthan the regional investigations, to identify and characterize the seismic and surface deformation potential of any capable tectonic sources and the seismic potential of seismogenic sources, or to demonstrate that such structures are not present.  Sites with capable tectonic sources within a radius of 40
1.Geological, Geophysical, Seismological, and Geotechnical Investigations1.1Comprehensive Site Area and Region Investigations Comprehensive geological, seismological, geophysical, and geotechnical engineering investigations of the site area and region should be performed.  For existing nuclear power plant sites
kilometers (km) (25 mi) may require more extensive geological and seismological investigations and analyses [similar in detail to investigations and analysis usually preferred within an 8 km (5 mi) radius].1.1.3Within a Radius of 8 Kilometers (5 mi) of the Site (Site Area)Detailed geological, seismological, geophysical, and geotechnical engineering investigationsshould be conducted to evaluate the potential for tectonic deformation at or near the ground surface and to assess the transmission characteristics of soils and rocks in the site vicinity.
 
where additional units are planned, the geosciences technical information originally used to validate
 
those sites may need to be updated.  Depending on (1) how much new or additional information has
 
become available since the initial investigations and analyses were performed, and (2) the complexity of
 
the site and regional geology and seismology, additional data may be require
 
====d. This technical====
 
information should be used, along with all other available information, to plan and determine the scope
 
of additional investigations.  The investigations described in this regulatory guide are performed
 
primarily to gather information needed to confirm the suitability of the site and to gather data pertinent to
 
the safe design and construction of the nuclear power plant.  Appropriate geological, seismological, and
 
geophysical investigations are described in Appendix C to this regulatory guid
 
====e. Geotechnical====
 
investigations are described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. 20).  Another important purpose for the site-
 
specific investigations is to determine whether there are any new data or interpretations that are not
 
adequately incorporated into the existing PSHA databases.  Appendix C also describes a method for
 
assessing the impact of new information, obtained during the site-specific investigations on the databases
 
used for the PSHA.
 
These investigations should be performed at four levels, with the degree of detail based on (1)
distance from the site, (2) the nature of the Quaternary tectonic regime, (3) the geological complexity of
 
the site and region, (4) the existence of potential seismic sources, and (5) the potential for surface
 
deformations, etc.  A more detailed discussion of the areas and levels of investigations and the bases for
 
them are presented in Appendix C to this regulatory guide.  General guidelines for the levels of
 
investigation are characterized as follows.
 
1.1.1 Within a Radius of 320 Kilometers (200 mi) of the Site (Site Region)
Conduct regional geological and seismological investigations to identify seismic sources.  These investigations should include literature reviews, the study of maps and remote sensing data and, if
 
necessary, onsite ground-truth reconnaissance.
 
1.1.2 Within a Radius of 40 Kilometers (25 mi) of the Site (Site Vicinity)
Geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations should be carried out in greater detail than the regional investigations, to identify and characterize the seismic and surface deformation
 
potential of any capable tectonic sources and the seismic potential of seismogenic sources, or to
 
demonstrate that such structures are not present.  Sites with capable tectonic sources within a radius of 40
 
kilometers (km) (25 mi) may require more extensive geological and seismological investigations and
 
analyses [similar in detail to investigations and analysis usually preferred within an 8 km (5 mi) radius].
1.1.3 Within a Radius of 8 Kilometers (5 mi) of the Site (Site Area)
Detailed geological, seismological, geophysical, and geotechnical engineering investigations should be conducted to evaluate the potential for tectonic deformation at or near the ground surface and
 
to assess the transmission characteristics of soils and rocks in the site vicinity.
 
RG 1.208, Page 12
1.1.4 Within a Radius of Approximately 1 Kilometer (0.6 mi) of the Site (Site Location)
Very detailed geological, geophysical, and geotechnical engineering investigations should be conducted to assess specific soil and rock characteristics, as described in Reference 20.1.2Expanding the Areas of Investigation The areas of investigation may need to be expanded beyond those specified above in regions that include capable tectonic sources, relatively high seismicity, or complex geology, or in regions that have
 
experienced a large, geologically recent earthquake identified in historical records or by paleoseismic
 
data.1.3Features Discovered During Construction It should be demonstrated that deformation features discovered during construction (particularly faults, potential soft zones, or other features of engineering significance) do not have the potential to
 
compromise the safety of the plant.  The newly identified features should be mapped and assessed as to
 
their rupture and ground motion generating potential while the excavations' walls and bases are exposed.
 
A commitment should be made, in documents (safety analysis reports) supporting the license application, to geologically map all excavations of significant size and to notify the NRC staff when excavations are
 
open for inspection.  This should apply to excavations for construction of all Seismic Category I
 
structures, as a minimum.1.4Justifying Assumptions and Conclusions Data sufficient to clearly justify all assumptions and conclusions should be presented.  Because engineering solutions cannot always be satisfactorily demonstrated for the effects of permanent ground
 
displacement, it is prudent to avoid a site that has a potential for surface or near-surface deformation.
 
Such sites normally will require extensive additional investigations.1.5Characterize Lithologic, Stratigraphic, Hydrologic, and Structural Geologic Conditions For the site and for the area surrounding the site, the lithologic, stratigraphic, hydrologic, and structural geologic conditions should be characterized.  The investigations should include the
 
measurement of the static and dynamic engineering properties of the materials underlying the site as well
 
as an evaluation of the physical evidence concerning the behavior during prior earthquakes of the
 
surficial materials and the substrata underlying the site.  The properties needed to assess the behavior of
 
the underlying material during earthquakes should be measured.  These include the potential for
 
liquefaction and the characteristics of the underlying material in transmitting earthquake ground motions
 
to the foundations of the plant (such as seismic wave velocities, density, water content, porosity, elastic
 
moduli, and strength).
RG 1.208, Page 132.Seismic Sources Significant to the Site Seismic Hazard2.1Evaluation of New Seismic Sources For sites in the CEUS, existing databases may be used to identify seismic sources to perform PSHA.  Previously unidentified seismic sources that were not included in these databases should be
 
appropriately characterized and sensitivity analyses performed to assess their significance to the seismic
 
hazard estimate.  The results of investigation discussed in Regulatory Position 1 should be used, in
 
accordance with Appendix C to this regulatory guide, to determine whether the seismic sources and their
 
characterization should be updated.  The guidance in Regulatory Positions 2.2 and 2.3 (below) and the
 
methods in Appendix C to this regulatory guide may be used if additional seismic sources are to be
 
developed as a result of investigations.2.2Use of Alternative Seismic Sources When existing methods and databases are not used or are not applicable, the guidance in Regulatory Position 2.3 should be used for identification and characterization of seismic source
 
====s.  The====
 
uncertainties in the characterization of seismic sources should be addressed.  "Seismic sources" is a
 
general term that is equivalent to capable tectonic sources.
 
Identification and characterization of seismic sources should be based on regional and site geological and geophysical data, historical and instrumental seismicity data, the regional stress field, and
 
geological evidence of prehistoric earthquakes.  Investigations to identify seismic sources are described


RG 1.208, Page 121.1.4Within a Radius of Approximately 1 Kilometer (0.6 mi) of the Site (Site Location)Very detailed geological, geophysical, and geotechnical engineering investigations should beconducted to assess specific soil and rock characteristics, as described in Reference 20.1.2Expanding the Areas of InvestigationThe areas of investigation may need to be expanded beyond those specified above in regions thatinclude capable tectonic sources, relatively high seismicity, or complex geology, or in regions that have experienced a large, geologically recent earthquake identified in historical records or by paleoseismic data.1.3Features Discovered During ConstructionIt should be demonstrated that deformation features discovered during construction (particularlyfaults, potential soft zones, or other features of engineering significance) do not have the potential to compromise the safety of the plant.  The newly identified features should be mapped and assessed as to their rupture and ground motion generating potential while the excavations' walls and bases are exposed.
in Appendix C to this regulatory guide. The bases for the identification of seismic sources should be


A commitment should be made, in documents (safety analysis reports) supporting the license application, to geologically map all excavations of significant size and to notify the NRC staff when excavations are open for inspectionThis should apply to excavations for construction of all Seismic Category I
describedA general list of characteristics to be evaluated for seismic sources is presented in Appendix
structures, as a minimum.1.4Justifying Assumptions and ConclusionsData sufficient to clearly justify all assumptions and conclusions should be presented.  Becauseengineering solutions cannot always be satisfactorily demonstrated for the effects of permanent ground displacement, it is prudent to avoid a site that has a potential for surface or near-surface deformation.


Such sites normally will require extensive additional investigations.1.5Characterize Lithologic, Stratigraphic, Hydrologic, and Structural Geologic ConditionsFor the site and for the area surrounding the site, the lithologic, stratigraphic, hydrologic, andstructural geologic conditions should be characterized.  The investigations should include the measurement of the static and dynamic engineering properties of the materials underlying the site as well as an evaluation of the physical evidence concerning the behavior during prior earthquakes of the surficial materials and the substrata underlying the site.  The properties needed to assess the behavior of the underlying material during earthquakes should be measured.  These include the potential for liquefaction and the characteristics of the underlying material in transmitting earthquake ground motions to the foundations of the plant (such as seismic wave velocities, density, water content, porosity, elastic moduli, and strength).
C.2.3Characterizing Seismic Potential As part of the seismic source characterization, the seismic potential for each source should be evaluated.  Typically, characterization of the seismic potential consists of four equally important
RG 1.208, Page 132.Seismic Sources Significant to the Site Seismic Hazard2.1Evaluation of New Seismic SourcesFor sites in the CEUS, existing databases may be used to identify seismic sources to performPSHA.  Previously unidentified seismic sources that were not included in these databases should be appropriately characterized and sensitivity analyses performed to assess their significance to the seismic hazard estimate.  The results of investigation discussed in Regulatory Position 1 should be used, in accordance with Appendix C to this regulatory guide, to determine whether the seismic sources and their characterization should be updated.  The guidance in Regulatory Positions 2.2 and 2.3 (below) and the methods in Appendix C to this regulatory guide may be used if additional seismic sources are to be developed as a result of investigations.2.2Use of Alternative Seismic SourcesWhen existing methods and databases are not used or are not applicable, the guidance inRegulatory Position 2.3 should be used for identification and characterization of seismic sources.  The uncertainties in the characterization of seismic sources should be addressed.  "Seismic sources" is a general term that is equivalent to capable tectonic sources.Identification and characterization of seismic sources should be based on regional and sitegeological and geophysical data, historical and instrumental seismicity data, the regional stress field, and geological evidence of prehistoric earthquakes.  Investigations to identify seismic sources are described in Appendix C to this regulatory guide.  The bases for the identification of seismic sources should be described.  A general list of characteristics to be evaluated for seismic sources is presented in Appendix C.2.3Characterizing Seismic PotentialAs part of the seismic source characterization, the seismic potential for each source should beevaluated.  Typically, characterization of the seismic potential consists of four equally important elements:(1)selection of a model for the spatial distribution of earthquakes in a source
 
elements:(1)selection of a model for the spatial distribution of earthquakes in a source
(2)selection of a model for the temporal distribution of earthquakes in a source
(2)selection of a model for the temporal distribution of earthquakes in a source
(3)selection of a model for the relative frequency of earthquakes of various magnitudes, includingan estimate for the largest earthquake that could occur in the source under the current tectonic regime(4)a complete description of the uncertaintyFor example, truncated exponential and characteristic earthquake models are often used for thedistribution of magnitudes.  A stationary Poisson process is used to model the spatial and temporal occurrences of earthquakes in a source.  For a general discussion of evaluating the earthquake potential and characterizing the uncertainty, refer to NUREG/CR-6372 (Ref. 9).  
(3)selection of a model for the relative frequency of earthquakes of various magnitudes, including an estimate for the largest earthquake that could occur in the source under the current tectonic
RG 1.208, Page 142.3.1Characterizing Seismic Potential When Alternative Methods and Databases Are UsedFor sites in the CEUS, the seismic sources and data accepted by the NRC in past licensingdecisions may be used as a starting point, along with the data gathered from the investigations carried out as described in Regulatory Position 1.Generally, the seismic sources for the CEUS are broad areal source zones because there isuncertainty about the underlying causes of earthquakes.  This uncertainty is caused by a lack of active surface faulting, a low rate of seismic activity, or a short historical record.  The assessment of earthquake recurrence for CEUS area sources commonly relies heavily on catalogs of historic earthquakes. Because these catalogs are incomplete and cover a relatively short period of time, the earthquake recurrence rate may not be estimated reliably.  Considerable care must be taken to correct for incompleteness and to model the uncertainty in the rate of earthquake recurrence.  To completely characterize the seismic potential for a source, it is also necessary to estimate the largest earthquake magnitude that a seismic source is capable of generating under the current tectonic regime.  This estimated magnitude defines the upper bound of the earthquake recurrence relationship.Primary methods for assessing maximum earthquakes for area sources usually include aconsideration of the historical seismicity record, the pattern and rate of seismic activity, the Quaternary geologic record (1.8 million years and younger), characteristics of the source, the current stress regime (and how it aligns with known tectonic structures), paleoseismic data, and analogs to sources in other regions considered tectonically similar to the CEUS.  Because of the shortness of the historical catalog and low rate of seismic activity, considerable judgment is needed.  It is important to characterize the large uncertainties in the assessment of the earthquake potential (Refs. 9 and 16).2.3.2Characterizing Seismic Potential for Western United States SitesFor sites located within the WUS, earthquakes can often be associated with known tectonicstructures with a high degree of certainty.  For faults, the earthquake potential is related to the characteristics of the estimated future rupture, such as the total rupture area, the length, or the amount of fault displacement.  Empirical relations can be used to estimate the earthquake potential from fault behavior data and also to estimate the amount of displacement that might be expected for a given magnitude.  It is prudent to use several different rupture length or area-versus-magnitude relations to obtain an estimate of the earthquake magnitude.  When such correlations are used, the earthquake potential is often evaluated as the mean of the distribution.  The difficult issue is the evaluation of the appropriate rupture dimension to be used.  This is a judgmental process based on geological data for the fault in question and the behavior of other regional fault systems of the same type.In addition to maximum magnitude, other elements of the recurrence model are generallyobtained using catalogs of seismicity, fault slip rate, and other data.  Known sources of uncertainty should be appropriately modeled.2.3.3Characterizing Seismic Potential for Sites Near Subduction ZonesFor sites near subduction zones, such as in the Pacific Northwest and Alaska, the maximummagnitude must be assessed for subduction zone seismic sources.  Worldwide observations indicate that the largest known earthquakes are associated with the plate boundary interface, although intraslab earthquakes may also have large magnitudes.  The assessment of plate interface earthquakes can be based on estimates of the expected dimensions of rupture or analogies to other subduction zones worldwide.
 
regime(4)a complete description of the uncertainty For example, truncated exponential and characteristic earthquake models are often used for the distribution of magnitudes.  A stationary Poisson process is used to model the spatial and temporal
 
occurrences of earthquakes in a source.  For a general discussion of evaluating the earthquake potential
 
and characterizing the uncertainty, refer to NUREG/CR-6372 (Ref. 9).  
RG 1.208, Page 14
2.3.1 Characterizing Seismic Potential When Alternative Methods and Databases Are Used For sites in the CEUS, the seismic sources and data accepted by the NRC in past licensing decisions may be used as a starting point, along with the data gathered from the investigations carried out
 
as described in Regulatory Position 1.
 
Generally, the seismic sources for the CEUS are broad areal source zones because there is uncertainty about the underlying causes of earthquakes.  This uncertainty is caused by a lack of active
 
surface faulting, a low rate of seismic activity, or a short historical record.  The assessment of earthquake
 
recurrence for CEUS area sources commonly relies heavily on catalogs of historic earthquake
 
====s. Because====
 
these catalogs are incomplete and cover a relatively short period of time, the earthquake recurrence rate
 
may not be estimated reliably.  Considerable care must be taken to correct for incompleteness and to
 
model the uncertainty in the rate of earthquake recurrence.  To completely characterize the seismic
 
potential for a source, it is also necessary to estimate the largest earthquake magnitude that a seismic
 
source is capable of generating under the current tectonic regime.  This estimated magnitude defines the
 
upper bound of the earthquake recurrence relationship.
 
Primary methods for assessing maximum earthquakes for area sources usually include a consideration of the historical seismicity record, the pattern and rate of seismic activity, the Quaternary
 
geologic record (1.8 million years and younger), characteristics of the source, the current stress regime (and how it aligns with known tectonic structures), paleoseismic data, and analogs to sources in other
 
regions considered tectonically similar to the CEUS.  Because of the shortness of the historical catalog
 
and low rate of seismic activity, considerable judgment is needed.  It is important to characterize the
 
large uncertainties in the assessment of the earthquake potential (Refs. 9 and 16).
2.3.2 Characterizing Seismic Potential for Western United States Sites For sites located within the WUS, earthquakes can often be associated with known tectonic structures with a high degree of certainty.  For faults, the earthquake potential is related to the
 
characteristics of the estimated future rupture, such as the total rupture area, the length, or the amount of
 
fault displacement.  Empirical relations can be used to estimate the earthquake potential from fault
 
behavior data and also to estimate the amount of displacement that might be expected for a given
 
magnitude.  It is prudent to use several different rupture length or area-versus-magnitude relations to
 
obtain an estimate of the earthquake magnitude.  When such correlations are used, the earthquake
 
potential is often evaluated as the mean of the distribution.  The difficult issue is the evaluation of the
 
appropriate rupture dimension to be used.  This is a judgmental process based on geological data for the
 
fault in question and the behavior of other regional fault systems of the same type.
 
In addition to maximum magnitude, other elements of the recurrence model are generally obtained using catalogs of seismicity, fault slip rate, and other data.  Known sources of uncertainty
 
should be appropriately modeled.
 
2.3.3 Characterizing Seismic Potential for Sites Near Subduction Zones For sites near subduction zones, such as in the Pacific Northwest and Alaska, the maximum magnitude must be assessed for subduction zone seismic sources.  Worldwide observations indicate that
 
the largest known earthquakes are associated with the plate boundary interface, although intraslab
 
earthquakes may also have large magnitudes.  The assessment of plate interface earthquakes can be based
 
on estimates of the expected dimensions of rupture or analogies to other subduction zones worldwide.
 
RG 1.208, Page 153.Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis Procedures A PSHA should be performed to allow for the use of multiple source models to estimate the likelihood of earthquake ground motions occurring at a site and to systematically take into account
 
uncertainties that exist in various parameters (such as seismic sources, maximum earthquakes, and
 
ground motion attenuation).  Alternative hypotheses are considered in a quantitative fashion in a PSHA.
 
They can be used to evaluate the sensitivity of the hazard to the uncertainties in the significant
 
parameters and to identify the relative contribution of each seismic source to the hazard.
 
The following steps describe a procedure acceptable to the NRC staff for performing a PSHA.3.1Perform Regional and Site Investigations Perform regional and site geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations in accordance with Regulatory Position 1 and Appendix C to this regulatory guide.3.2Evaluation of New Information For CEUS sites, perform an evaluation of seismic sources, in accordance with Appendix C to this regulatory guide, to determine whether they are consistent with the site-specific data gathered in
 
Regulatory Position 3.1 or if they require updating.  The PSHA should be updated if the new information
 
indicates that the current version of the seismic source model underestimates the hazard or if new
 
attenuation relationships are available.  In most cases, limited-scope sensitivity studies are sufficient to
 
demonstrate that the existing database in the PSHA envelops the findings from site-specific
 
investigations.  Any significant update should follow the guidance of NUREG/CR-6372 (Ref. 9).3.3Conduct a Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis Perform a site-specific PSHA with up-to-date interpretations of earthquake sources, earthquake recurrence, and strong ground motion estimation using original or updated sources as determined in
 
Regulatory Positions 3.1 and 3.2.  CAV filtering can be used in place of a lower-bound magnitude cutoff
 
of 5.0 (Ref. 18).  For the CEUS, the understanding of single- and double-corner ground-motion models is
 
evolving, and the PSHA should fully document the appropriateness of using either or both of these
 
models.  Characterize epistemic uncertainties in a complete and defensible fashio
 
====n. Aleatory variability====
 
of the ground motion as expressed in the choice of standard deviation of natural log of ground motion
 
used in the PSHA should be considered carefully and described.  The ground motion estimates should be
 
made in the free field to develop the seismic hazard information base discussed in Appendix D to this
 
regulatory guide.3.4Hazard Assessment Report fractile hazard curves at the following fractile levels (p) for each ground motion parameter: 0.05, 0.16, 0.50, 0.84, and 0.95, as well as the mean.  Report the fractile hazard curves in
 
tabular as well as graphical format.  Also, determine the mean UHRS for annual exceedance frequencies
 
of 1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06 at a minimum of 30 structural frequencies approximately equally spaced on
 
a logarithmic frequency axis between 100 and 0.1 Hz.
 
RG 1.208, Page 163.5Deaggregate the Mean Probabilistic Hazard Characterization Deaggregate the mean probabilistic hazard characterization at ground motion levels corresponding to the annual frequencies of 1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06 in accordance with Appendix D to
 
this regulatory guide.  Deaggregation provides information useful for review of the PSHA and insight
 
into the seismic sources that most impact the hazard at a particular site.  It can also be used to determine
 
the controlling earthquakes (i.e., magnitudes and distances) and document the hazard information base as
 
discussed in Appendix D.4.Seismic Wave Transmission Characteristics of the Site The hazard curves from the PSHA are defined for general surficial rock conditions that are consistent with the definition of rock for the attenuation relationships used in the PSHA.  For example, existing attenuation relationships for the CEUS typically define generic rock conditions as materials with
 
a shear wave velocity (Vs) of 2.8 km/sec (9,200 ft/sec).  Because the surficial and subsurface shear wave


RG 1.208, Page 153.Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis ProceduresA PSHA should be performed to allow for the use of multiple source models to estimate thelikelihood of earthquake ground motions occurring at a site and to systematically take into account uncertainties that exist in various parameters (such as seismic sources, maximum earthquakes, and ground motion attenuation).  Alternative hypotheses are considered in a quantitative fashion in a PSHA.
velocities at nuclear power plant sites are generally less than those for the generic rock conditions, the


They can be used to evaluate the sensitivity of the hazard to the uncertainties in the significant parameters and to identify the relative contribution of each seismic source to the hazard.The following steps describe a procedure acceptable to the NRC staff for performing a PSHA.3.1Perform Regional and Site InvestigationsPerform regional and site geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations inaccordance with Regulatory Position 1 and Appendix C to this regulatory guide.3.2Evaluation of New InformationFor CEUS sites, perform an evaluation of seismic sources, in accordance with Appendix C to thisregulatory guide, to determine whether they are consistent with the site-specific data gathered in Regulatory Position 3.1 or if they require updating.  The PSHA should be updated if the new information indicates that the current version of the seismic source model underestimates the hazard or if new attenuation relationships are available.  In most cases, limited-scope sensitivity studies are sufficient to demonstrate that the existing database in the PSHA envelops the findings from site-specific investigations.  Any significant update should follow the guidance of NUREG/CR-6372 (Ref. 9).3.3Conduct a Probabilistic Seismic Hazard AnalysisPerform a site-specific PSHA with up-to-date interpretations of earthquake sources, earthquakerecurrence, and strong ground motion estimation using original or updated sources as determined in Regulatory Positions 3.1 and 3.2.  CAV filtering can be used in place of a lower-bound magnitude cutoff of 5.0 (Ref. 18).  For the CEUS, the understanding of single- and double-corner ground-motion models is evolving, and the PSHA should fully document the appropriateness of using either or both of these models.  Characterize epistemic uncertainties in a complete and defensible fashion.  Aleatory variability of the ground motion as expressed in the choice of standard deviation of natural log of ground motion used in the PSHA should be considered carefully and described.  The ground motion estimates should be made in the free field to develop the seismic hazard information base discussed in Appendix D to this regulatory guide.3.4Hazard AssessmentReport fractile hazard curves at the following fractile levels (p) for each ground motionparameter: 0.05, 0.16, 0.50, 0.84, and 0.95, as well as the mean.  Report the fractile hazard curves in tabular as well as graphical format.  Also, determine the mean UHRS for annual exceedance frequencies of 1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06 at a minimum of 30 structural frequencies approximately equally spaced on a logarithmic frequency axis between 100 and 0.1 Hz.
following procedures should be used to define the UHRS at the free-field ground surfac


RG 1.208, Page 163.5Deaggregate the Mean Probabilistic Hazard CharacterizationDeaggregate the mean probabilistic hazard characterization at ground motion levelscorresponding to the annual frequencies of 1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06 in accordance with Appendix D to this regulatory guide.  Deaggregation provides information useful for review of the PSHA and insight into the seismic sources that most impact the hazard at a particular site.  It can also be used to determine the controlling earthquakes (i.e., magnitudes and distances) and document the hazard information base as discussed in Appendix D.4.Seismic Wave Transmission Characteristics of the SiteThe hazard curves from the PSHA are defined for general surficial rock conditions that areconsistent with the definition of rock for the attenuation relationships used in the PSHA.  For example, existing attenuation relationships for the CEUS typically define generic rock conditions as materials with a shear wave velocity (Vs) of 2.8 km/sec (9,200 ft/sec).  Because the surficial and subsurface shear wave velocities at nuclear power plant sites are generally less than those for the generic rock conditions, the following procedures should be used to define the UHRS at the free-field ground surface.  Additional discussion pertaining to this regulatory position is provided in Appendix E to this regulatory guide.For both soil and rock sites, the subsurface model should extend to sufficient depth to reach thegeneric rock conditions as defined in the attenuation relationships used in the PSHA.4.1Site and Laboratory Investigations and TestingPerform site and laboratory investigations and testing to obtain data defining the static anddynamic engineering properties of the site-specific soil and rock materials.  Consideration should be given to spatial distribution both within individual geologic strata and across the site.  Methods acceptable to the NRC staff are described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. 20), Regulatory Guide 1.138 (Ref. 21), and Subsection C.2.2.2 of Appendix C to this regulatory guide.  Sufficient site property data should be developed to adequately estimate the mean and variability of the properties in the site response calculations.  When soil models are deduced from laboratory studies, the sampling and testing programs should be critically peer reviewed to ensure that the generated soil dynamic nonlinear properties are appropriate to properly characterize site response.4.2Dynamic Site ResponseUsing the site-specific dynamic properties of the soil and information on hazard levels from therock-based site-specific UHRS, the dynamic site response should be determined through analyses based on either time history or random vibration theory (RVT).  If a time history-based procedure is used, it is necessary to determine an appropriate set of ground motions or earthquake time histories for each of the target response spectra to be analyzed.  A sufficient number of time histories should be used to obtain consistent average behavior from the dynamic site response analyses.  The target response spectra may be based on Controlling Earthquakes, as discussed in Appendix E.RVT methods characterize the input rock motion using a Fourier amplitude spectrum instead oftime domain earthquake input motions.  This spectrum is propagated through the soil to the surface using frequency domain transfer functions and computing peak ground accelerations or spectral accelerations using extreme value statistics.  In the past, traditional site response analyses using time histories has been most prevalent.  However, RVT methods are acceptable as long as the strain dependent soil properties are adequately accounted for in the analysis.
====e. Additional====


RG 1.208, Page 17Reference 6 contains a database of recorded time histories on rock for both the CEUS and WUSto be used as seed motions for site response analyses.  The database is divided into magnitude and distance bins, with each bin having a minimum of 15, three-component (two horizontal and one vertical)
discussion pertaining to this regulatory position is provided in Appendix E to this regulatory guide.
sets.  If these records are used as seed motions, they should be developed consistent with the recommendations in Reference 6.  Appendix F to this regulatory guide provides criteria acceptable to the NRC staff for developing and evaluating sets of modified ground motions used for soil response and structural analyses.  The time histories are scaled or spectrally matched to match the response spectrum and have characteristics appropriate for the corresponding target response spectrum.Often vertically propagating shear waves are the dominant contributor to free-field groundmotions at a site.  In these cases, a one-dimensional equivalent-linear analysis or nonlinear analysis that assumes vertical propagation of shear waves may be appropriate.  However, site characteristics (such as a dipping bedrock surface, topographic effects, or other impedance boundaries), regional characteristics (such as certain topographic effects), and source characteristics (such as nearby dipping seismic sources)
may require that analyses are also able to account for inclined waves.A Monte Carlo or equivalent procedure should be used to accommodate the variability in soildepth, shear wave velocities, layer thicknesses, and strain-dependent dynamic nonlinear material properties at the site.  A sufficient number of convolution analyses should be performed using scaled earthquake time histories to adequately capture the effect of the site subsurface variability and the uncertainty in the soil properties.  Generally, at least 60 convolution analyses should be performed to define the mean and the standard deviation of the site response.  The results of the site response analyses are used to develop high- and low-frequency site amplification functions as detailed in Appendix E to this regulatory guide.4.3Site Amplification FunctionBased on the site response analyses described in Regulatory Position 4.2, site amplificationfunctions are calculated.  To determine the UHRS at the free-field ground surface for a specific annual probability of exceedance, multiply the rock-based UHRS by either the high-frequency or low-frequency site amplification functions as appropriate for each frequency.  The appropriate site amplification function is determined for each frequency based on which of the controlling or input earthquakes has a spectral value that is closest to the rock UHRS at that frequency.  At high frequencies, this will be the high-frequency spectral amplification function, and at low-frequencies, the low-frequency site amplification function.  By applying the appropriate (high- or low-frequency) amplification function for each frequency to the mean rock-based UHRS, the site-specific soil-based UHRS is calculated for the free ground surface.  The surface 1 E-04 and 1 E-05 UHRS are site-specific earthquake ground motions that form the basis of the performance-based site GMRS.5.Performance-Based Site-Specific Earthquake Ground Motion Procedure5.1Horizontal SpectrumThe performance-based, site-specific earthquake ground motion is developed using a methodanalogous to the development of the ASCE/SEI Standard 43-05 (Ref. 7) design response spectrum (DRS)
that achieves the annual FOSID target performance goal (PF) of 1 E-05, and hazard exceedanceprobability (HD) of 1 E-04, described in Chapters 1 and 2 of Reference 7, and also discussed in Section Bof this guide.  The horizontal site-specific, performance-based GMRS are obtained by scaling the site- specific mean UHRS by a design factor (DF), or RG 1.208, Page 18GMRS = UHRS x DFEquation (1)where UHRS is the mean 1 E-04 UHRS derived in accordance with Regulatory Position 4.3, andDF (from Reference 7) isDF = max { 1.0, 0.6(AR)0.8 }Equation (2)where AR is the ground motion slope ratio of spectral accelerations, frequency by frequency,from a seismic hazard curve corresponding to a 10-fold reduction in hazard exceedance frequency;
therefore,AR = mean 1 E-05 UHRS ÷ mean 1 E-04 UHRSEquation (3)Figure 2 provides a comparison of the performance-based, site-specific horizontal GMRS and themean 1 E-04 and 1 E-05 UHRS.The above is based on the assumption that the hazard curves are approximated by a power lawequation (i.e., linear on a log-log plot) in the range of 1 E-04 to 1 E-05.  If AR is greater than 4.2, then thisassumption is not valid.  In these cases, it is acceptable to use a value equal to 45 percent of the mean 1 E-05 UHRS.  Using this method, results in a GMRS that achieves the annual FOSID target of 1 E-05.5.2Vertical SpectrumVertical response spectra are developed by combining the appropriate horizontal responsespectra and the most up-to-date V/H response spectral ratios appropriate for either CEUS or WUS sites.


Appropriate V/H ratios for CEUS or WUS rock and soil sites are best determined from the most up-to- date attenuation relations.  However, as there are currently no CEUS attenuation relations that predict vertical ground motions, appropriate V/H ratios for CEUS rock sites provided in Reference 6 may be used. For CEUS soil sites, References 6 and 22 describe a procedure to determine a WUS-to-CEUS
For both soil and rock sites, the subsurface model should extend to sufficient depth to reach the generic rock conditions as defined in the attenuation relationships used in the PSHA.4.1Site and Laboratory Investigations and Testing Perform site and laboratory investigations and testing to obtain data defining the static and dynamic engineering properties of the site-specific soil and rock materialsConsideration should be
transfer function that may be used to modify the WUS V/H soil ratios.  Other methods used to determine V/H ratios may also be appropriate.5.3Location of the Site Ground Motion Response SpectrumThe horizontal and vertical GMRS are determined in the free field on the ground surfaceForsites with soil layers near the surface that will be completely excavated to expose competent material, the GMRS are specified on the outcrop or hypothetical outcrop that will exist after excavation.  Motions at this hypothetical outcrop should be developed as a free surface motion, not as an in-column motion.


Although the definition of competent material is not mandated by regulation, a number of reactor designs have specified a shear wave velocity of 1,000 fps as the definition of competent material.  When the GMRS are determined as free-field outcrop motions on the uppermost in-situ competent material, only the effects of the materials below this elevation are included in the site response analysis.
given to spatial distribution both within individual geologic strata and across the sit


RG 1.208, Page 195.4Determination of Safe Shutdown EarthquakeThe SSE is the vibratory ground motion for which certain structures, systems, and componentsare designed to remain functional, pursuant to Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50.  The SSE for the site is characterized by both horizontal and vertical free-field ground motion response spectra at the free ground surface.  The purpose of this regulatory guide is to provide guidance on the development of the site-specific GMRS.  The GMRS satisfy the requirements of 10 CFR 100.23 with respect to the development of the SSE.  In the performance-based approach described in this guide, the GMRS are based on the site-specific UHRS at the free-field ground surface modified by a design factor to obtain the performance-based site-specific response spectrum.  The design factor achieves a relatively consistent annual probability of plant component failure across the range of plant locations and structural frequencies.The steps necessary to develop the final SSE are described in Chapter 3, "Design of Structures,Components, Equipment, and Systems," of NUREG-0800, "Standard Review Plan."  This process is defined by two distinct options.  The first option is for COL applicants using a standard design nuclear power plant.  The standard designs use broad-band smooth response spectra, referred to as certified seismic design response spectra (CSDRS).  The CSDRS are site-independent seismic design response spectra scaled to a peak ground motion value.  Under the first option or combined license procedure, the GMRS are used to determine the adequacy of the CSDRS for the site.  If adequate, the CSDRS become the SSE for the site.  Alternatively, under the second option an applicant would develop a site-specific nuclear power plant design based on a site SSE.  For some sites the GMRS may not contain adequate energy in the frequency range of engineering interest and, therefore, may not be appropriate as the site-specific plant SSE.  For these situations the GMRS could either be broadened or enveloped by a smoothed spectrum.During the design phase, an additional check of the ground motion is required at the foundationlevel.  According to Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50, the foundation level ground motion must be represented by an appropriate response spectrum with a peak ground acceleration of at least 0.1g.  The steps necessary to determine the final SSE, such as the acceptability of the CSDRS for a given site and the minimum seismic design-basis requirements, are described in Chapter 3 of NUREG-0800.
====e. Methods====


RG 1.208, Page 20Figure 2.  Comparison of the Mean 1 E-04 and 1 E-05 Uniform Hazard ResponseSpectra and the Performance-Based Ground Motion Response Spectrum (GMRS)Mean UHRS 1E-5 Mean UHRS 1E-4 Performance-Based GMRS  
acceptable to the NRC staff are described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. 20), Regulatory Guide 1.138 (Ref. 21), and Subsection C.2.2.2 of Appendix C to this regulatory guide.  Sufficient site property data
RG 1.208, Page 21
 
should be developed to adequately estimate the mean and variability of the properties in the site response
 
calculations.  When soil models are deduced from laboratory studies, the sampling and testing programs
 
should be critically peer reviewed to ensure that the generated soil dynamic nonlinear properties are
 
appropriate to properly characterize site response.4.2Dynamic Site Response Using the site-specific dynamic properties of the soil and information on hazard levels from the rock-based site-specific UHRS, the dynamic site response should be determined through analyses based
 
on either time history or random vibration theory (RVT).  If a time history-based procedure is used, it is
 
necessary to determine an appropriate set of ground motions or earthquake time histories for each of the
 
target response spectra to be analyzed.  A sufficient number of time histories should be used to obtain
 
consistent average behavior from the dynamic site response analyses.  The target response spectra may be
 
based on Controlling Earthquakes, as discussed in Appendix E.
 
RVT methods characterize the input rock motion using a Fourier amplitude spectrum instead of time domain earthquake input motions.  This spectrum is propagated through the soil to the surface using
 
frequency domain transfer functions and computing peak ground accelerations or spectral accelerations
 
using extreme value statistics.  In the past, traditional site response analyses using time histories has been
 
most prevalent.  However, RVT methods are acceptable as long as the strain dependent soil properties
 
are adequately accounted for in the analysis.
 
RG 1.208, Page 17 Reference 6 contains a database of recorded time histories on rock for both the CEUS and WUS
to be used as seed motions for site response analyses.  The database is divided into magnitude and
 
distance bins, with each bin having a minimum of 15, three-component (two horizontal and one vertical)
 
sets.  If these records are used as seed motions, they should be developed consistent with the
 
recommendations in Reference 6.  Appendix F to this regulatory guide provides criteria acceptable to the
 
NRC staff for developing and evaluating sets of modified ground motions used for soil response and
 
structural analyses.  The time histories are scaled or spectrally matched to match the response spectrum
 
and have characteristics appropriate for the corresponding target response spectrum.
 
Often vertically propagating shear waves are the dominant contributor to free-field ground motions at a site.  In these cases, a one-dimensional equivalent-linear analysis or nonlinear analysis that
 
assumes vertical propagation of shear waves may be appropriate.  However, site characteristics (such as a
 
dipping bedrock surface, topographic effects, or other impedance boundaries), regional characteristics (such as certain topographic effects), and source characteristics (such as nearby dipping seismic sources)
 
may require that analyses are also able to account for inclined waves.
 
A Monte Carlo or equivalent procedure should be used to accommodate the variability in soil depth, shear wave velocities, layer thicknesses, and strain-dependent dynamic nonlinear material
 
properties at the site.  A sufficient number of convolution analyses should be performed using scaled
 
earthquake time histories to adequately capture the effect of the site subsurface variability and the
 
uncertainty in the soil properties.  Generally, at least 60 convolution analyses should be performed to
 
define the mean and the standard deviation of the site response.  The results of the site response analyses
 
are used to develop high- and low-frequency site amplification functions as detailed in Appendix E to
 
this regulatory guide.4.3Site Amplification Function Based on the site response analyses described in Regulatory Position 4.2, site amplification functions are calculated.  To determine the UHRS at the free-field ground surface for a specific annual
 
probability of exceedance, multiply the rock-based UHRS by either the high-frequency or low-frequency
 
site amplification functions as appropriate for each frequency.  The appropriate site amplification
 
function is determined for each frequency based on which of the controlling or input earthquakes has a
 
spectral value that is closest to the rock UHRS at that frequency.  At high frequencies, this will be the
 
high-frequency spectral amplification function, and at low-frequencies, the low-frequency site
 
amplification function.  By applying the appropriate (high- or low-frequency) amplification function for
 
each frequency to the mean rock-based UHRS, the site-specific soil-based UHRS is calculated for the
 
free ground surface.  The surface 1 E-04 and 1 E-05 UHRS are site-specific earthquake ground motions
 
that form the basis of the performance-based site GMRS.
 
5.Performance-Based Site-Specific Earthquake Ground Motion Procedure5.1Horizontal Spectrum The performance-based, site-specific earthquake ground motion is developed using a method analogous to the development of the ASCE/SEI Standard 43-05 (Ref. 7) design response spectrum (DRS)
 
that achieves the annual FOSID target performance goal (P
F) of 1 E-05, and hazard exceedance probability (H
D) of 1 E-04, described in Chapters 1 and 2 of Reference 7, and also discussed in Section B
of this guide.  The horizontal site-specific, performance-based GMRS are obtained by scaling the site-
 
specific mean UHRS by a design factor (DF), or RG 1.208, Page 18GMRS = UHRS x DFEquation (1)
where UHRS is the mean 1 E-04 UHRS derived in accordance with Regulatory Position 4.3, and DF (from Reference 7) is DF = max { 1.0, 0.6(A
R)0.8 }Equation (2)
where A R is the ground motion slope ratio of spectral accelerations, frequency by frequency, from a seismic hazard curve corresponding to a 10-fold reduction in hazard exceedance frequency;
 
therefore, A R = mean 1 E-05 UHRS ÷ mean 1 E-04 UHRSEquation (3)
Figure 2 provides a comparison of the performance-based, site-specific horizontal GMRS and the mean 1 E-04 and 1 E-05 UHRS.
 
The above is based on the assumption that the hazard curves are approximated by a power law equation (i.e., linear on a log-log plot) in the range of 1 E-04 to 1 E-0
 
===5.  If A===
R is greater than 4.2, then this assumption is not valid.  In these cases, it is acceptable to use a value equal to 45 percent of the mean 1
 
E-05 UHRS.  Using this method, results in a GMRS that achieves the annual FOSID target of 1 E-05.5.2Vertical Spectrum Vertical response spectra are developed by combining the appropriate horizontal response spectra and the most up-to-date V/H response spectral ratios appropriate for either CEUS or WUS sites.
 
Appropriate V/H ratios for CEUS or WUS rock and soil sites are best determined from the most up-to-
 
date attenuation relations.  However, as there are currently no CEUS attenuation relations that predict
 
vertical ground motions, appropriate V/H ratios for CEUS rock sites provided in Reference 6 may be
 
used.  For CEUS soil sites, References 6 and 22 describe a procedure to determine a WUS-to-CEUS
 
transfer function that may be used to modify the WUS V/H soil ratios.  Other methods used to determine
 
V/H ratios may also be appropriate.5.3Location of the Site Ground Motion Response Spectrum The horizontal and vertical GMRS are determined in the free field on the ground surface.  For sites with soil layers near the surface that will be completely excavated to expose competent material, the
 
GMRS are specified on the outcrop or hypothetical outcrop that will exist after excavatio
 
====n. Motions at====
 
this hypothetical outcrop should be developed as a free surface motion, not as an in-column motion.
 
Although the definition of competent material is not mandated by regulation, a number of reactor designs
 
have specified a shear wave velocity of 1,000 fps as the definition of competent materia
 
====l. When the====
 
GMRS are determined as free-field outcrop motions on the uppermost in-situ competent material, only
 
the effects of the materials below this elevation are included in the site response analysis.
 
RG 1.208, Page 195.4Determination of Safe Shutdown Earthquake The SSE is the vibratory ground motion for which certain structures, systems, and components are designed to remain functional, pursuant to Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50.  The SSE for the site is
 
characterized by both horizontal and vertical free-field ground motion response spectra at the free ground
 
surface.  The purpose of this regulatory guide is to provide guidance on the development of the
 
site-specific GMRS.  The GMRS satisfy the requirements of 10 CFR 100.23 with respect to the
 
development of the SSE.  In the performance-based approach described in this guide, the GMRS are
 
based on the site-specific UHRS at the free-field ground surface modified by a design factor to obtain the
 
performance-based site-specific response spectrum.  The design factor achieves a relatively consistent
 
annual probability of plant component failure across the range of plant locations and structural
 
frequencies.
 
The steps necessary to develop the final SSE are described in Chapter 3, "Design of Structures, Components, Equipment, and Systems," of NUREG-0800, "Standard Review Plan."  This process is
 
defined by two distinct options.  The first option is for COL applicants using a standard design nuclear
 
power plant.  The standard designs use broad-band smooth response spectra, referred to as certified
 
seismic design response spectra (CSDRS).  The CSDRS are site-independent seismic design response
 
spectra scaled to a peak ground motion value.  Under the first option or combined license procedure, the
 
GMRS are used to determine the adequacy of the CSDRS for the site.  If adequate, the CSDRS become
 
the SSE for the site.  Alternatively, under the second option an applicant would develop a site-specific
 
nuclear power plant design based on a site SSE.  For some sites the GMRS may not contain adequate
 
energy in the frequency range of engineering interest and, therefore, may not be appropriate as the
 
site-specific plant SSE.  For these situations the GMRS could either be broadened or enveloped by a
 
smoothed spectrum.
 
During the design phase, an additional check of the ground motion is required at the foundation level.  According to Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50, the foundation level ground motion must be
 
represented by an appropriate response spectrum with a peak ground acceleration of at least 0.1
 
====g.  The====
 
steps necessary to determine the final SSE, such as the acceptability of the CSDRS for a given site and
 
the minimum seismic design-basis requirements, are described in Chapter 3 of NUREG-0800.
 
RG 1.208, Page 20Figure 2.  Comparison of the Mean 1 E-04 and 1 E-05 Uniform Hazard ResponseSpectra and the Performance-Based Ground Motion Response Spectrum (GMRS)
Mean UHRS 1E-5
 
Mean UHRS 1E-4
 
Performance-Based GMRS  
RG 1.208, Page 21  


==D. IMPLEMENTATION==
==D. IMPLEMENTATION==
The purpose of this section is to provide information to applicants regarding the NRC staff'splans for using this regulatory guide.  No backfitting is intended or approved in connection with its issuance.This regulatory guide identifies methods that the NRC staff considers acceptable for (1)conducting geological, geophysical, seismological, and geotechnical investigations, (2) identifying and characterizing seismic sources, (3) conducting probabilistic seismic hazard analyses, (4) determining seismic wave transmission characteristics of soil and rock sites, and (5) determining a performance-based site-specific GMRS, for satisfying the requirements of 10 CFR 100.23.  A brief overview of techniques to develop the SSE in order to satisfy the requirements of Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50 is also included in this guide and in NUREG-0800, "Standard Review Plan," Section 3.7.1.REGULATORY ANALYSIS / BACKFIT ANALYSISThe regulatory analysis and backfit analysis for this regulatory guide are available in DraftRegulatory Guide DG-1146, "A Performance-Based Approach to Define the Site-Specific Earthquake Ground Motion" (Ref. 23).  The NRC issued DG-1146 in October 2006 to solicit public comment on the draft version of Regulatory Guide 1.208.
The purpose of this section is to provide information to applicants regarding the NRC staff's plans for using this regulatory guide.  No backfitting is intended or approved in connection with its
 
issuance.This regulatory guide identifies methods that the NRC staff considers acceptable for (1)
conducting geological, geophysical, seismological, and geotechnical investigations, (2) identifying and


4All NRC regulations listed herein are available electronically through the Public Electronic Reading Room on theNRC's public Web site, at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/doc-collections/cfr/Copies are also available for inspectionor copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, MD; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737 or (800) 397-4209; fax (301)
characterizing seismic sources, (3) conducting probabilistic seismic hazard analyses, (4) determining
415-3548; email PDR@nrc.gov.5All NUREG-series reports listed herein were published by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.  Copies areavailable for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, MD; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737 or
 
(800) 397-4209; fax (301) 415-3548; email PDR@nrc.gov.  Copies are also available at current rates from the U.S.Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, Washington, DC 20402-9328, telephone (202) 512-1800; or from the National Technical Information Service (NTIS) at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, Virginia 22161, online at http://www.ntis.gov, by telephone at (800) 553-NTIS (6847) or (703) 605-6000, or by fax to (703) 605-6900. NUREG-0800 is also available electronically through the Electronic Reading Room on the NRC's public Web site, at http://www.nrc.gov/ reading-rm/doc-collections/nuregs/.6All regulatory guides listed herein were published by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission. Where an accession number is identified, the specified regulatory guide is available electronically through the NRC's Agencywide Documents Access and Management System (ADAMS) at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/adams.html.  All otherregulatory guides are available electronically through the Public Electronic Reading Room on the NRC's public Web site, at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/doc-collections/reg-guides/. Single copies of regulatory guides may also beobtained free of charge by writing the Reproduction and Distribution Services Section, ADM, USNRC, Washington, DC 20555-0001, or by fax to (301) 415-2289, or by email to DISTRIBUTION@nrc.gov.  Active guides may also bepurchased from the National Technical Information Service (NTIS) on a standing order basis. Details on this service may be obtained by contacting NTIS at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, Virginia 22161, online at http://www.ntis.gov, by telephone at (800) 553-NTIS (6847) or (703) 605-6000, or by fax to (703) 605-6900Copiesare also available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room (PDR), which is located at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, Maryland; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555-
seismic wave transmission characteristics of soil and rock sites, and (5) determining a performance-based
0001.  The PDR can also be reached by telephone at (301) 415-4737 or (800) 397-4209, by fax at (301) 415-3548, and by email to PDR@nrc.gov.RG 1.208, Page 22REFERENCES1.U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Energy, Part 100, "Reactor Site Criteria."42.U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Energy, Part 50, "Domestic Licensing of Productionand Utilization Facilities."53.U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Energy, Part 52, "Licenses, Certifications, andApprovals for Nuclear Power Plants."54.NUREG-0800, "Standard Review Plan for the Review of Safety Analysis Reports for NuclearPower Plants," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.55.Regulatory Guide 1.165, "Identification and Characterization of Seismic Sources andDetermination of Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.6
 
7Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room at 11555 RockvillePike, Rockville, MD; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737 or (800) 397-4209; fax (301) 415-3548; email PDR@nrc.gov. In addition, copies are available at current rates fromthe U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, Washington, DC 20402-9328, telephone (202) 512-1800; or from the National Technical Information Service (NTIS) at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, Virginia 22161, online at http://www.ntis.gov, by telephone at (800) 553-NTIS (6847) or (703) 605-6000, or by fax to (703) 605-6900.8Copies may be purchased from the American Society for Civil Engineers (ASCE), 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston,VA 20190 [phone:  800-548-ASCE (2723)]Purchase information is available through the ASCE Web site at http://www.asce.org/bookstore/book.cfm?isbn=07844076229Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, MD; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737 or (800) 397-4209; fax (301) 415-3548; email PDR@nrc.gov.RG 1.208, Page 236.McGuire, R.K., W.J. Silva, and C.J. Costantino, "Technical Basis for Revision of RegulatoryGuidance on Design Ground Motions:  Hazard- and Risk-Consistent Ground Motion Spectra Guidelines," NUREG/CR-6728, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC,
site-specific GMRS, for satisfying the requirements of 10 CFR 100.23A brief overview of techniques
October 2001.77.ASCE/SEI 43-05, "Seismic Design Criteria for Structures, Systems, and Components in NuclearFacilities," American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute, 2005.88.Regulatory Guide 1.60, "Design Response Spectra for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants,"U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.79.Budnitz, R.J., et al., "Recommendations for Probabilistic Seismic Hazard AnalysisGuidance onUncertainty and Use of Experts," NUREG/CR-6372, Volumes 1 and 2, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, April 1997.810.Pacific Gas and Electric Company, "Final Report of the Diablo Canyon Long-Term SeismicProgram:  Diablo Canyon Power Plant," Docket Nos. 50-275 and 50-323, 1988.911.Rood, H., et al., "Safety Evaluation Report Related to the Operation of Diablo Canyon NuclearPower Plant, Units 1 and 2," NUREG-0675, Supplement No. 34, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, June 1991.812.Sorensen, G., Washington Public Power Supply System, Letter to Document Control Branch,U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, Subject: "Nuclear Project No. 3, Resolution of Key Licensing Issues, Response," February 29, 1988.1013.Bernreuter, D.L., et al., "Seismic Hazard Characterization of 69 Nuclear Plant Sites East of theRocky Mountains," NUREG/CR-5250, Volumes 1-8, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, January 1989.814.Sobel, P., "Revised Livermore Seismic Hazard Estimates for Sixty-Nine Nuclear Power PlantSites East of the Rocky Mountains," NUREG-1488, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, April 1994.815.Savy, J.B., et al., "Eastern Seismic Hazard Characterization Update," UCRL-ID-115111,Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, June 1993 (Accession #9310190318 in the NRC's Public Document Room).10  
 
to develop the SSE in order to satisfy the requirements of Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50 is also included
 
in this guide and in NUREG-0800, "Standard Review Plan," Section 3.7.1.
 
REGULATORY ANALYSIS / BACKFIT ANALYSIS
The regulatory analysis and backfit analysis for this regulatory guide are available in Draft Regulatory Guide DG-1146, "A Performance-Based Approach to Define the Site-Specific Earthquake
 
Ground Motion" (Ref. 23).  The NRC issued DG-1146 in October 2006 to solicit public comment on the
 
draft version of Regulatory Guide 1.208.
 
4 All NRC regulations listed herein are available electronically through the Public Electronic Reading Room on the NRC's public Web site, at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/doc-collections/cfr/.  Copies are also available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, MD; the PDR's
 
mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737 or (800) 397-4209; fax (301)
 
415-3548; email PDR@nrc.gov
.5 All NUREG-series reports listed herein were published by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.  Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, MD; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737 or
 
(800) 397-4209; fax (301) 415-3548; email PDR@nrc.gov. Copies are also available at current rates from the U.S.
 
Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, Washington, DC 20402-9328, telephone (202) 512-1800; or from the
 
National Technical Information Service (NTIS) at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, Virginia 22161, online at
 
http://www.ntis.gov , by telephone at (800) 553-NTIS (6847) or (703) 605-6000, or by fax to (703) 605-6900.
 
NUREG-0800 is also available electronically through the Electronic Reading Room on the NRC's public Web site, at
 
http://www.nrc.gov/ reading-rm/doc-collections/nuregs/
.6 All regulatory guides listed herein were published by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commissio
 
====n. Where an accession====
 
number is identified, the specified regulatory guide is available electronically through the NRC's Agencywide
 
Documents Access and Management System (ADAMS) at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/adams.html. All other regulatory guides are available electronically through the Public Electronic Reading Room on the NRC's public Web
 
site, at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/doc-collections/reg-guides/Single copies of regulatory guides may also be obtained free of charge by writing the Reproduction and Distribution Services Section, ADM, USNRC, Washington, DC 20555-0001, or by fax to (301) 415-2289, or by email to DISTRIBUTION@nrc.gov. Active guides may also be purchased from the National Technical Information Service (NTIS) on a standing order basis. Details on this service
 
may be obtained by contacting NTIS at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, Virginia 22161, online at
 
http://www.ntis.gov , by telephone at (800) 553-NTIS (6847) or (703) 605-6000, or by fax to (703) 605-6900. Copies are also available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room (PDR), which is located
 
at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, Maryland; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555-
 
0001. The PDR can also be reached by telephone at (301) 415-4737 or (800) 397-4209, by fax at (301) 415-3548, and
 
by email to PDR@nrc.gov
.RG 1.208, Page 22 REFERENCES
1.U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Energy, Part 100, "Reactor Site Criteria."
4 2.U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Energy, Part 50, "Domestic Licensing of Production and Utilization Facilities."
5 3.U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Energy, Part 52, "Licenses, Certifications, and Approvals for Nuclear Power Plants."
54.NUREG-0800, "Standard Review Plan for the Review of Safety Analysis Reports for Nuclear Power Plants," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.
 
55.Regulatory Guide 1.165, "Identification and Characterization of Seismic Sources and Determination of Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory
 
Commission, Washington, DC.
 
6
7 Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, MD; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737
 
or (800) 397-4209; fax (301) 415-3548; email PDR@nrc.govIn addition, copies are available at current rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, Washington, DC 20402-9328, telephone (202) 512-1800; or
 
from the National Technical Information Service (NTIS) at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, Virginia 22161, online
 
at http://www.ntis.gov , by telephone at (800) 553-NTIS (6847) or (703) 605-6000, or by fax to (703) 605-6900.
 
8 Copies may be purchased from the American Society for Civil Engineers (ASCE), 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20190 [phone:  800-548-ASCE (2723)]. Purchase information is available through the ASCE Web site at
 
http://www.asce.org/bookstore/book.cfm?isbn=0784407622
9 Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room at 11555 Rockville
 
Pike, Rockville, MD; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737
 
or (800) 397-4209; fax (301) 415-3548; email PDR@nrc.gov
.RG 1.208, Page 236.McGuire, R.K., W.J. Silva, and C.J. Costantino, "Technical Basis for Revision of Regulatory Guidance on Design Ground Motions:  Hazard- and Risk-Consistent Ground Motion Spectra
 
Guidelines," NUREG/CR-6728, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC,
October 2001.
 
77.ASCE/SEI 43-05, "Seismic Design Criteria for Structures, Systems, and Components in Nuclear Facilities," American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute, 2005.
 
88.Regulatory Guide 1.60, "Design Response Spectra for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants,"
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
 
79.Budnitz, R.J., et al., "Recommendations for Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis:  Guidance on Uncertainty and Use of Experts," NUREG/CR-6372, Volumes 1 and 2, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory
 
Commission, Washington, DC, April 1997.
 
810.Pacific Gas and Electric Company, "Final Report of the Diablo Canyon Long-Term Seismic ProgramDiablo Canyon Power Plant," Docket Nos. 50-275 and 50-323, 1988.
 
911.Rood, H., et al., "Safety Evaluation Report Related to the Operation of Diablo Canyon Nuclear Power Plant, Units 1 and 2," NUREG-0675, Supplement No. 34, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory
 
Commission, Washington, DC, June 1991.
 
812.Sorensen, G., Washington Public Power Supply System, Letter to Document Control Branch, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, Subject: "Nuclear Project No. 3, Resolution of Key Licensing Issues, Response," February 29, 1988.
 
1013.Bernreuter, D.L., et al., "Seismic Hazard Characterization of 69 Nuclear Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains," NUREG/CR-5250, Volumes 1-8, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, January 1989.
 
814.Sobel, P., "Revised Livermore Seismic Hazard Estimates for Sixty-Nine Nuclear Power Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains," NUREG-1488, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, April 1994.
 
815.Savy, J.B., et al., "Eastern Seismic Hazard Characterization Update," UCRL-ID-115111, Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, June 1993 (Accession #9310190318 in the NRC's
 
Public Document Room).
10  
10Draft Regulatory Guide DG-1146 is available electronically under Accession #ML063030291 in the NRC'sAgencywide Documents Access and Management System (ADAMS) at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/adams.html. Copies are also available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room (PDR), which is located at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville Maryland; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC
10Draft Regulatory Guide DG-1146 is available electronically under Accession #ML063030291 in the NRC'sAgencywide Documents Access and Management System (ADAMS) at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/adams.html. Copies are also available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room (PDR), which is located at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville Maryland; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC
20555-0001.  The PDR can also be reached by telephone at (301) 415-4737 or (800) 397-4209, by fax at (301) 415-3548, and by email to PDR@nrc.gov.RG 1.208, Page 2416.Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), "Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Evaluations at NuclearPower Plant Sites in the Central and Eastern United States," NP-4726, All Volumes, 1989-1991.17.Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), "The Earthquakes of Stable Continental Regions,"Volume 1:  Assessment of Large Earthquake Potential, EPRI TR-102261-V1, 1994.18.Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) and U.S. Department of Energy (DOE), "Program onTechnology Innovation:  Use of Minimum CAV in Determining Effects of Small Magnitude Earthquakes on Seismic Hazard Analyses," Report 1012965, December 2005.19.Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) and U.S. Department of Energy (DOE), "Program onTechnology Innovation:  Truncation of the Lognormal Distribution and Value of the Standard Deviation for Ground Motion Models in the Central and Eastern United States," Report 1013105, February 2006.20.Regulatory Guide 1.132, "Site Investigations for Foundations of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S.Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.721.Regulatory Guide 1.138, "Laboratory Investigations of Soils and Rocks for Engineering Analysisand Design of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.722.McGuire, R.K., W.J. Silva, and C.J. Costantino, "Technical Basis for Revision of RegulatoryGuidance on Design Ground Motions:  Development of Hazard- and Risk-Consistent Seismic Spectra for Two Sites," NUREG/CR-6769, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, April 2002.823.Draft Regulatory Guide DG-1146, "A Performance-Based Approach to Define the Site-SpecificEarthquake Ground Motion," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.10  
20555-0001.  The PDR can also be reached by telephone at (301) 415-4737 or (800) 397-4209, by fax at (301) 415-3548, and by email to PDR@nrc.gov
Appendix A to RG 1.208, Page A-1APPENDIX ADEFINITIONSAccepted PSHA Model. An accepted PSHA model is a method of conducting a Probabilistic SeismicHazard Analysis (including the seismic sources and ground motion equations) that has been developed using Senior Seismic Hazard Analysis Committee (SSHAC) guidelines and that has been reviewed and accepted by the NRC in the past either for generic application (e.g., the 1989 studies by LLNL and EPRI,
.RG 1.208, Page 2416.Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), "Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Evaluations at Nuclear Power Plant Sites in the Central and Eastern United States," NP-4726, All Volumes, 1989-1991.17.Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), "The Earthquakes of Stable Continental Regions,"
Volume 1:  Assessment of Large Earthquake Potential, EPRI TR-102261-V1, 1994.18.Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) and U.S. Department of Energy (DOE), "Program on Technology Innovation:  Use of Minimum CAV in Determining Effects of Small Magnitude
 
Earthquakes on Seismic Hazard Analyses," Report 1012965, December 2005.19.Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) and U.S. Department of Energy (DOE), "Program on Technology Innovation:  Truncation of the Lognormal Distribution and Value of the Standard
 
Deviation for Ground Motion Models in the Central and Eastern United States," Report 1013105, February 2006.20.Regulatory Guide 1.132, "Site Investigations for Foundations of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S.
 
Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.
 
721.Regulatory Guide 1.138, "Laboratory Investigations of Soils and Rocks for Engineering Analysis and Design of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.
 
722.McGuire, R.K., W.J. Silva, and C.J. Costantino, "Technical Basis for Revision of Regulatory Guidance on Design Ground Motions:  Development of Hazard- and Risk-Consistent Seismic
 
Spectra for Two Sites," NUREG/CR-6769, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, April 2002.
 
823.Draft Regulatory Guide DG-1146, "A Performance-Based Approach to Define the Site-Specific Earthquake Ground Motion," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.
 
10  
Appendix A to RG 1.208, Page A-1 APPENDIX A
DEFINITIONS
Accepted PSHA Model.
 
An accepted PSHA model is a method of conducting a Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis (including the seismic sources and ground motion equations) that has been developed
 
using Senior Seismic Hazard Analysis Committee (SSHAC) guidelines and that has been reviewed and
 
accepted by the NRC in the past either for generic application (e.g., the 1989 studies by LLNL and EPRI,
with the inherent seismic source description for the CEUS) or as part of an ESP or COL application.
with the inherent seismic source description for the CEUS) or as part of an ESP or COL application.


Accepted PSHA models are starting points for developing probabilistic seismic hazard calculations for new ESP or COL applications, yet must be updated with new information on seismicity, geology, geophysics, and ground motion equations, as appropriate for a site that is being reviewed.  The term accepted PSHA model should not be assumed to imply that the model can be used without updates or reviews as discussed RG 1.208.Capable Tectonic Source.  A capable tectonic source is a tectonic structure that can generate bothvibratory ground motion and tectonic surface deformation such as faulting or folding at or near the earth's surface in the present seismotectonic regime.  It is described by at least one of the following:
Accepted PSHA models are starting points for developing probabilistic seismic hazard calculations for
characteristics:(1)presence of surface or near-surface deformation of landforms or geologic deposits of a recurringnature within the last approximately 500,000 years or at least once in the last approximately
50,000 years(2)a reasonable association with one or more moderate to large earthquakes or sustained earthquakeactivity that are usually accompanied by significant surface deformation(3)a structural association with a capable tectonic source that has characteristics of either item a or b(above), such that movement on one could be reasonably expected to be accompanied by movement on the otherIn some cases, the geological evidence of past activity at or near the ground surface along a potentialcapable tectonic source may be obscured at a particular site.  This might occur, for example, at a site having a deep overburden.  For these cases, evidence may exist elsewhere along the structure from which an evaluation of its characteristics in the vicinity of the site can be reasonably based.  Such evidence is to be used in determining whether the structure is a capable tectonic source within this definition.


Notwithstanding the foregoing paragraphs, the association of a structure with geological structures that are at least pre-Quaternary, such as many of those found in the central and eastern regions of the United States, in the absence of conflicting evidence, will demonstrate that the structure is not a capable tectonic source within this definition.Certified Seismic Design Response Spectra (CSDRS).  Site-independent seismic design responsespectra that have been approved under Subpart B of 10 CFR Part 52 as the seismic design response spectra for an approved certified standard design nuclear power plant.  The input or control location for the CSDRS is specified in the certified standard design.
new ESP or COL applications, yet must be updated with new information on seismicity, geology, geophysics, and ground motion equations, as appropriate for a site that is being reviewe


Appendix A to RG 1.208, Page A-2Combined License.  A combined construction permit and operating license with conditions for a nuclearpower facility issued pursuant to Subpart C of 10 CFR Part 52.Controlling Earthquakes.  Earthquakes used to determine spectral shapes or to estimate ground motionsat the site for some methods of dynamic site response.  There may be several controlling earthquakes for a site.  As a result of the probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA), controlling earthquakes are characterized as mean magnitudes and distances derived from a deaggregation analysis of the mean estimate of the PSHA.Cumulative Absolute Velocity (CAV).  For each component of the free-field ground motion, the CAVshould be calculated as follows:  (1) the absolute acceleration (g units) time-history is divided into
====d. The term====
1-second intervals, (2) each 1-second interval that has at least 1 exceedance of 0.025g is integrated over time, and (3) all the integrated values are summed together to arrive at the CAV.  The CAV is exceeded if the calculation is greater than 0.16 g-second.  The application of the CAV in siting requires the development of a CAV model (Ref. 18) because the PSHA calculation does not use time histories directly.Deaggregation.  The process for determining the fractional contribution of each magnitude-distance pairto the total seismic hazard.  To accomplish this, a set of magnitude and distance bins are selected and the annual probability of exceeding selected ground acceleration parameters from each magnitude-distance pair is computed and divided by the total probability for earthquakes.Design Factor.  The ratio between the site-specific GMRS and the UHRS.  The design factor is aimed atachieving the target annual probability of failure associated with the target performance goals.Early Site Permit.  A Commission approval, issued pursuant to Subpart A of 10 CFR Part 52, for a siteor sites for one or more nuclear power facilities.Earthquake Recurrence.  The frequency of occurrence of earthquakes as a function of magnitude. Recurrence relationships or curves are developed for each seismic source, and they reflect the frequency of occurrence (usually expressed on an annual basis) of magnitudes up to the maximum, including measures of uncertainty.Frequency of Onset of Significant Inelastic Deformation (FOSID).  The annual probability of theonset of significant inelastic deformation (OSID).  OSID is just beyond the occurrence of insignificant (or localized) inelastic deformation, and in this way corresponds to "essentially elastic behavior."  As such, OSID of a structure, system, or component (SSC) can be expected to occur well before seismically induced core damage, resulting in much larger frequencies of OSID than seismic core damage frequency (SCDF) values.  In fact, OSID occurs before SSC "failure," where the term failure refers to impaired functionality.Ground Motion Response Spectra (GMRS).  A site-specific ground motion response spectracharacterized by horizontal and vertical response spectra determined as free-field motions on the ground surface or as free-field outcrop motions on the uppermost in-situ competent material using performance-based procedures.  When the GMRS are determined as free-field outcrop motions on the uppermost in-situ competent material, only the effects of the materials below this elevation are included in the site response analysis.


Appendix A to RG 1.208, Page A-3Ground Motion Slope Ratio.  Ratio of the spectral accelerations, frequency by frequency, from aseismic hazard curve corresponding to a 10-fold reduction in hazard exceedance frequency.  (See Equation 3 in Regulatory Position 5.1.)In-column Motion.  Motion that is within a soil column, as opposed to the motion at the surface ortreated as if it is at the surface.Intensity.  The intensity of an earthquake is a qualitative description of the effects of the earthquake at aparticular location, as evidenced by observed effects on humans, on human-built structures, and on the earth's surface at a particular location.  Commonly used scales to specify intensity are the Rossi-Forel, Mercalli, and Modified Mercalli.  The Modified Mercalli Intensity (MMI) scale describes intensities with values ranging from I to XII in the order of severity.  MMI of I indicates an earthquake that was not felt except by a very few, whereas MMI of XII indicates total damage of all works of construction, either partially or completely.Magnitude.  An earthquake's magnitude is a measure of the strength of the earthquake as determinedfrom seismographic observations and is an objective, quantitative measure of the size of an earthquake.
accepted PSHA model should not be assumed to imply that the model can be used without updates or


The magnitude can be expressed in various ways based on seismographic records (e.g., Richter Local Magnitude, Surface Wave Magnitude, Body Wave Magnitude, and Moment Magnitude).  Currently, the most commonly used magnitude measurement is the Moment Magnitude, Mw, which is based on theseismic moment computed as the rupture force along the fault multiplied by the average amount of slip, and thus is a direct measure of the energy released during an earthquake.Maximum Magnitude.  The maximum magnitude is the upper bound to earthquake recurrence curves.Mean Site Amplification Function.  The mean amplification function is obtained for each controllingearthquake, by dividing the response spectrum from the computed surface motion by the response spectrum from the input hard rock motion, and computing the arithmetic mean of the individual response spectral ratios.Nontectonic Deformation.  Nontectonic deformation is distortion of surface or near-surface soils orrocks that is not directly attributable to tectonic activity.  Such deformation includes features associated with subsidence, karst terrain, glaciation or deglaciation, and growth faulting.Response Spectrum.  A plot of the maximum responses (acceleration, velocity, or displacement) ofidealized single-degree-of-freedom oscillators as a function of the natural frequencies of the oscillators for a given damping value.  The response spectrum is calculated for a specified vibratory motion input at the oscillators' supports.Ring Area.  Annular region bounded by radii associated with the distance rings used in hazarddeaggregation (Table D.1, "Recommended Magnitude and Distance Bins," in Appendix D to this regulatory guide).Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE).  The vibratory ground motion for which certainstructures, systems, and components are designed, pursuant to Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50, to remain functional. The SSE for the site is characterized by both horizontal and vertical free-field ground motion response spectra at the free ground surface.
reviews as discussed RG 1.208.


Appendix A to RG 1.208, Page A-4Seismic Wave Transmission (Site Amplification).  The amplification (increase or decrease) ofearthquake ground motion by rock and soil near the earth's surface in the vicinity of the site of interest.
Capable Tectonic Source.
 
A capable tectonic source is a tectonic structure that can generate both vibratory ground motion and tectonic surface deformation such as faulting or folding at or near the earth's
 
surface in the present seismotectonic regime.  It is described by at least one of the following:
 
characteristics:(1)presence of surface or near-surface deformation of landforms or geologic deposits of a recurring nature within the last approximately 500,000 years or at least once in the last approximately
 
50,000 years(2)a reasonable association with one or more moderate to large earthquakes or sustained earthquake activity that are usually accompanied by significant surface deformation(3)a structural association with a capable tectonic source that has characteristics of either item a or b (above), such that movement on one could be reasonably expected to be accompanied by
 
movement on the other In some cases, the geological evidence of past activity at or near the ground surface along a potential capable tectonic source may be obscured at a particular site.  This might occur, for example, at a site
 
having a deep overburden.  For these cases, evidence may exist elsewhere along the structure from which
 
an evaluation of its characteristics in the vicinity of the site can be reasonably base
 
====d. Such evidence is to====
 
be used in determining whether the structure is a capable tectonic source within this definition.
 
Notwithstanding the foregoing paragraphs, the association of a structure with geological structures that
 
are at least pre-Quaternary, such as many of those found in the central and eastern regions of the United
 
States, in the absence of conflicting evidence, will demonstrate that the structure is not a capable tectonic
 
source within this definition.
 
Certified Seismic Design Response Spectra (CSDRS). 
Site-independent seismic design response spectra that have been approved under Subpart B of 10 CFR Part 52 as the seismic design response
 
spectra for an approved certified standard design nuclear power plant.  The input or control location for
 
the CSDRS is specified in the certified standard design.
 
Appendix A to RG 1.208, Page A-2 Combined License.  A combined construction permit and operating license with conditions for a nuclear power facility issued pursuant to Subpart C of 10 CFR Part 52.
 
Controlling Earthquakes.  Earthquakes used to determine spectral shapes or to estimate ground motions at the site for some methods of dynamic site response.  There may be several controlling earthquakes for
 
a site.  As a result of the probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA), controlling earthquakes are
 
characterized as mean magnitudes and distances derived from a deaggregation analysis of the mean
 
estimate of the PSHA.
 
Cumulative Absolute Velocity (CAV).  For each component of the free-field ground motion, the CAV
should be calculated as follows:  (1) the absolute acceleration (g units) time-history is divided into
 
1-second intervals, (2) each 1-second interval that has at least 1 exceedance of 0.025g is integrated over
 
time, and (3) all the integrated values are summed together to arrive at the CAV.  The CAV is exceeded
 
if the calculation is greater than 0.16 g-second.  The application of the CAV in siting requires the
 
development of a CAV model (Ref. 18) because the PSHA calculation does not use time histories
 
directly.Deaggregation.  The process for determining the fractional contribution of each magnitude-distance pair to the total seismic hazard.  To accomplish this, a set of magnitude and distance bins are selected and the
 
annual probability of exceeding selected ground acceleration parameters from each magnitude-distance
 
pair is computed and divided by the total probability for earthquakes.
 
Design Factor.
 
The ratio between the site-specific GMRS and the UHRS.  The design factor is aimed at achieving the target annual probability of failure associated with the target performance goals.
 
Early Site Permit.  A Commission approval, issued pursuant to Subpart A of 10 CFR Part 52, for a site or sites for one or more nuclear power facilities.
 
Earthquake Recurrence.  The frequency of occurrence of earthquakes as a function of magnitude.
 
Recurrence relationships or curves are developed for each seismic source, and they reflect the frequency
 
of occurrence (usually expressed on an annual basis) of magnitudes up to the maximum, including
 
measures of uncertainty.
 
Frequency of Onset of Significant Inelastic Deformation (FOSID).  The annual probability of the onset of significant inelastic deformation (OSID).  OSID is just beyond the occurrence of insignificant (or localized) inelastic deformation, and in this way corresponds to "essentially elastic behavior."  As
 
such, OSID of a structure, system, or component (SSC) can be expected to occur well before seismically
 
induced core damage, resulting in much larger frequencies of OSID than seismic core damage frequency (SCDF) values.  In fact, OSID occurs before SSC "failure," where the term failure refers to impaired
 
functionality.
 
Ground Motion Response Spectra (GMRS).
A site-specific ground motion response spectra characterized by horizontal and vertical response spectra determined as free-field motions on the ground
 
surface or as free-field outcrop motions on the uppermost in-situ competent material using
 
performance-based procedures.  When the GMRS are determined as free-field outcrop motions on the
 
uppermost in-situ competent material, only the effects of the materials below this elevation are included
 
in the site response analysis.
 
Appendix A to RG 1.208, Page A-3 Ground Motion Slope Ratio.  Ratio of the spectral accelerations, frequency by frequency, from a seismic hazard curve corresponding to a 10-fold reduction in hazard exceedance frequency.  (See
 
Equation 3 in Regulatory Position 5.1.)
In-column Motion.  Motion that is within a soil column, as opposed to the motion at the surface or treated as if it is at the surface.
 
Intensity.  The intensity of an earthquake is a qualitative description of the effects of the earthquake at a particular location, as evidenced by observed effects on humans, on human-built structures, and on the
 
earth's surface at a particular location.  Commonly used scales to specify intensity are the Rossi-Forel, Mercalli, and Modified Mercalli.  The Modified Mercalli Intensity (MMI) scale describes intensities with
 
values ranging from I to XII in the order of severity.  MMI of I indicates an earthquake that was not felt
 
except by a very few, whereas MMI of XII indicates total damage of all works of construction, either
 
partially or completely.
 
Magnitude.  An earthquake's magnitude is a measure of the strength of the earthquake as determined from seismographic observations and is an objective, quantitative measure of the size of an earthquake.
 
The magnitude can be expressed in various ways based on seismographic records (e.g., Richter Local
 
Magnitude, Surface Wave Magnitude, Body Wave Magnitude, and Moment Magnitude).  Currently, the
 
most commonly used magnitude measurement is the Moment Magnitude, M
w , which is based on the seismic moment computed as the rupture force along the fault multiplied by the average amount of slip, and thus is a direct measure of the energy released during an earthquake.
 
Maximum Magnitude.  The maximum magnitude is the upper bound to earthquake recurrence curves.
 
Mean Site Amplification Function.  The mean amplification function is obtained for each controlling earthquake, by dividing the response spectrum from the computed surface motion by the response
 
spectrum from the input hard rock motion, and computing the arithmetic mean of the individual response
 
spectral ratios.
 
Nontectonic Deformation.  Nontectonic deformation is distortion of surface or near-surface soils or rocks that is not directly attributable to tectonic activity.  Such deformation includes features associated
 
with subsidence, karst terrain, glaciation or deglaciation, and growth faulting.
 
Response Spectrum.
 
A plot of the maximum responses (acceleration, velocity, or displacement) of idealized single-degree-of-freedom oscillators as a function of the natural frequencies of the oscillators
 
for a given damping value.  The response spectrum is calculated for a specified vibratory motion input at
 
the oscillators' supports.
 
Ring Area.  Annular region bounded by radii associated with the distance rings used in hazard deaggregation (Table D.1, "Recommended Magnitude and Distance Bins," in Appendix D to this
 
regulatory guide).
Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE).  The vibratory ground motion for which certain structures, systems, and components are designed, pursuant to Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50, to remain
 
functional.  The SSE for the site is characterized by both horizontal and vertical free-field ground motion
 
response spectra at the free ground surface.
 
Appendix A to RG 1.208, Page A-4 Seismic Wave Transmission (Site Amplification).  The amplification (increase or decrease) of earthquake ground motion by rock and soil near the earth's surface in the vicinity of the site of interest.
 
Topographic effects, the effect of the water table, and basin edge wave-propagation effects are sometimes
 
included under site response.
 
Seismogenic Source.  A portion of the earth that is assumed to have a uniform earthquake potential (same expected maximum earthquake and recurrence frequency), distinct from that of surrounding
 
sources.  A seismogenic source will generate vibratory ground motion but is assumed to not cause surface
 
displacement.  Seismogenic sources cover a wide range of seismotectonic conditions, from a well-defined
 
tectonic structure to simply a large region of diffuse seismicity.
 
Spectral Acceleration.  Peak acceleration response of an oscillator as a function of period or frequency and damping ratio when subjected to an acceleration time history.  It is equal to the peak relative
 
displacement of a linear oscillator of frequency, f, attached to the ground, times the quantity (2f)2.  It is expressed in units of gravity (g) or cm/second
2.Stable Continental Region (SCR).  An SCR is composed of continental crust, including continental shelves, slopes, and attenuated continental crust, and excludes active plate boundaries and zones of
 
currently active tectonics directly influenced by plate margin processes.  It exhibits no significant
 
deformation associated with the major Mesozoic-to-Cenozoic (last 240 million years) orogenic belts.  It
 
excludes major zones of Neogene (last 25 million years) rifting, volcanism, or suturing.
 
Stationary Poisson Process.  A probabilistic model of the occurrence of an event over time (or space)
that has the following characteristics:  (1) the occurrence of the event in small intervals is constant over
 
time (or space), (2) the occurrence of two (or more) events in a small interval is negligible, and (3) the
 
occurrence of the event in non-overlapping intervals is independent.
 
Target Performance Goal (P
F).  Target annual probability of exceeding the 1 E-05 frequency of onset of significant inelastic deformation (FOSID) limit state.
 
Tectonic Structure.  A large-scale dislocation or distortion, usually within the earth's crust.  Its extent may be on the order of tens of meters (yards) to hundreds of kilometers (miles).
Uniform Hazard Response Spectrum (UHRS).  A plot of a ground response parameter (for example, spectral acceleration or spectral velocity) that has an equal likelihood of exceedance at different
 
frequencies.
 
Within Motion.  An earthquake record modified for use in a site response model.  Within motions are developed through deconvolution of a surface recording to account for the properties of the overburden
 
material at the level at which the record is to be applied.  The within motion can also be called the


Topographic effects, the effect of the water table, and basin edge wave-propagation effects are sometimes included under site response.Seismogenic Source.  A portion of the earth that is assumed to have a uniform earthquake potential(same expected maximum earthquake and recurrence frequency), distinct from that of surrounding sources.  A seismogenic source will generate vibratory ground motion but is assumed to not cause surface displacement.  Seismogenic sources cover a wide range of seismotectonic conditions, from a well-defined tectonic structure to simply a large region of diffuse seismicity.Spectral Acceleration.  Peak acceleration response of an oscillator as a function of period or frequencyand damping ratio when subjected to an acceleration time history.  It is equal to the peak relative displacement of a linear oscillator of frequency, f, attached to the ground, times the quantity (2f)2.  It isexpressed in units of gravity (g) or cm/second2.Stable Continental Region (SCR).  An SCR is composed of continental crust, including continentalshelves, slopes, and attenuated continental crust, and excludes active plate boundaries and zones of currently active tectonics directly influenced by plate margin processes.  It exhibits no significant deformation associated with the major Mesozoic-to-Cenozoic (last 240 million years) orogenic belts.  It excludes major zones of Neogene (last 25 million years) rifting, volcanism, or suturing.Stationary Poisson Process.  A probabilistic model of the occurrence of an event over time (or space)that has the following characteristics:  (1) the occurrence of the event in small intervals is constant over time (or space), (2) the occurrence of two (or more) events in a small interval is negligible, and (3) the occurrence of the event in non-overlapping intervals is independent.Target Performance Goal (PF).  Target annual probability of exceeding the 1 E-05 frequency of onsetof significant inelastic deformation (FOSID) limit state.Tectonic Structure.  A large-scale dislocation or distortion, usually within the earth's crust.  Its extentmay be on the order of tens of meters (yards) to hundreds of kilometers (miles).Uniform Hazard Response Spectrum (UHRS).  A plot of a ground response parameter (for example,spectral acceleration or spectral velocity) that has an equal likelihood of exceedance at different frequencies.Within Motion.  An earthquake record modified for use in a site response model.  Within motions aredeveloped through deconvolution of a surface recording to account for the properties of the overburden material at the level at which the record is to be applied.  The within motion can also be called the
"bedrock motion" if it occurs at a high-impedance boundary where rock is first encountered.
"bedrock motion" if it occurs at a high-impedance boundary where rock is first encountered.


Appendix B to RG 1.208, Page B-1APPENDIX BABBREVIATIONSApeak ground accelerationADAMSAgencywide Documents Access and Management System (NRC)
Appendix B to RG 1.208, Page B-1 APPENDIX B
ARground motion slope ratioASCEAmerican Society of Civil Engineers ASTMAmerican Society of Testing and MaterialsCAVcumulative absolute velocityCFRCode of Federal RegulationsCPconstruction permit CEUScentral and eastern United States COLcombined license CSDRScertified seismic design response spectraDdistanceDpeak ground displacement DFdesign factor DOEU.S. Department of Energy DRSdesign response spectrumEPRIElectric Power Research InstituteESPearly site permitFIRSfoundation input response spectraFOSIDfrequency of onset of significant inelastic deformationGMRSground motion response spectra HDmean annual hazard exceedance frequency/probabilityIAEAInternational Atomic Energy Agency LLNLLawrence Livermore National Laboratory MmagnitudeMMIModified Mercalli IntensityNGANext Generation AttenuationNRCU.S. Nuclear Regulatory CommissionOLoperating licenseOMBOffice of Management and Budget OSIDonset of significant inelastic deformation Appendix B to RG 1.208, Page B-2PFtarget performance goalPDRPublic Document Room (NRC)
ABBREVIATIONSApeak ground accelerationADAMSAgencywide Documents Access and Management System (NRC)
PGApeak ground acceleration PGVpeak ground velocity PSHAprobabilistic seismic hazard analysisRPprobability ratioRVTrandom vibration theorySCDFseismic core damage frequencySCRstable continental region SDCseismic design category SRPStandard Review Plan (NUREG-0800)
 
SSCsstructures, systems, and components SSEsafe shutdown earthquake ground motion SSHACSenior Seismic Hazard Analysis Committee StandardASCE/SEI Standard 43-05 (Ref. 7)UHRSuniform hazard response spectrumUSNRCU.S. Nuclear Regulatory CommissionVpeak ground velocityV/Hratio of vertical to horizontal spectral accelerations Vsshear wave velocityWUSwestern United States Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-1APPENDIX CINVESTIGATIONS TO CHARACTERIZESITE GEOLOGY, SEISMOLOGY AND GEOPHYSICSC.1IntroductionAs characterized for use in probabilistic seismic hazard analyses (PSHA), seismogenic sourcesare zones within which future earthquakes are likely to occur.  Geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations provide the information needed to identify and characterize source zone parameters, such as size and geometry, and to estimate earthquake recurrence rates and maximum magnitudes.  The amount of data available about earthquakes and their causative sources varies substantially between the western United States (WUS) (west of the Rocky Mountain front) and the central and eastern United States (CEUS), or stable continental region (east of the Rocky Mountain front).  Furthermore, there are variations in the amount and quality of data within these regions.Seismogenic sources in active tectonic regions such as the WUS are generally readily identifiedbecause of their relatively high activity rate.  In the CEUS, identifying seismogenic sources is more difficult because their activity rate is relatively low and because most seismic sources are covered by thick deposits.  However, several significant tectonic structures exist and some of these have been interpreted as seismogenic sources (e.g., the New Madrid fault zone, Nemaha Ridge, and Meers fault).In the CEUS, it is most likely that the determination of the properties of the seismogenic source,whether it is a tectonic structure or a broad areal source zone, will be inferred rather than demonstrated by strong correlations with seismicity or geologic data.  Moreover, it is not generally known what relationships exist between observed tectonic structures in a seismic source within the CEUS and the current earthquake activity that may be associated with that source.  The historical seismicity record, the results of regional and site studies, and expert judgment play key roles in characterizing a source zone.
A R ground motion slope ratioASCEAmerican Society of Civil Engineers ASTMAmerican Society of Testing and MaterialsCAVcumulative absolute velocity CFR Code of Federal RegulationsCPconstruction permit CEUScentral and eastern United States COLcombined license CSDRScertified seismic design response spectraDdistanceDpeak ground displacement DFdesign factor DOEU.S. Department of Energy DRSdesign response spectrumEPRIElectric Power Research InstituteESPearly site permitFIRSfoundation input response spectraFOSIDfrequency of onset of significant inelastic deformationGMRSground motion response spectra
 
H D mean annual hazard exceedance frequency/probabilityIAEAInternational Atomic Energy Agency LLNLLawrence Livermore National Laboratory MmagnitudeMMIModified Mercalli IntensityNGANext Generation AttenuationNRCU.S. Nuclear Regulatory CommissionOLoperating licenseOMBOffice of Management and Budget OSIDonset of significant inelastic deformation Appendix B to RG 1.208, Page B-2 P F target performance goalPDRPublic Document Room (NRC)
PGApeak ground acceleration PGVpeak ground velocity PSHAprobabilistic seismic hazard analysis R P probability ratioRVTrandom vibration theorySCDFseismic core damage frequencySCRstable continental region SDCseismic design category SRPStandard Review Plan (NUREG-0800)
SSCsstructures, systems, and components SSEsafe shutdown earthquake ground motion SSHACSenior Seismic Hazard Analysis Committee StandardASCE/SEI Standard 43-05 (Ref. 7)UHRSuniform hazard response spectrumUSNRCU.S. Nuclear Regulatory CommissionVpeak ground velocityV/Hratio of vertical to horizontal spectral accelerations
 
V s shear wave velocityWUSwestern United States Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-1 APPENDIX C
INVESTIGATIONS TO CHARACTERIZE
SITE GEOLOGY, SEISMOLOGY AND GEOPHYSICSC.1Introduction As characterized for use in probabilistic seismic hazard analyses (PSHA), seismogenic sources are zones within which future earthquakes are likely to occur.  Geological, seismological, and
 
geophysical investigations provide the information needed to identify and characterize source zone
 
parameters, such as size and geometry, and to estimate earthquake recurrence rates and maximum
 
magnitudes.  The amount of data available about earthquakes and their causative sources varies
 
substantially between the western United States (WUS) (west of the Rocky Mountain front) and the
 
central and eastern United States (CEUS), or stable continental region (east of the Rocky Mountain
 
front).  Furthermore, there are variations in the amount and quality of data within these regions.
 
Seismogenic sources in active tectonic regions such as the WUS are generally readily identified because of their relatively high activity rate.  In the CEUS, identifying seismogenic sources is more
 
difficult because their activity rate is relatively low and because most seismic sources are covered by


If, on the other hand, strong correlations and data exist suggesting a relationship between seismicity and seismic sources, approaches used for more active tectonic regions can be appliedReference C.1 may be used to assess potential for large earthquakes.The primary objective of geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations is to developan up-to-date, site-specific earth science database that supports site characterization and a site-specific PSHA.  The results of these investigations will also be used to assess whether new data and their interpretation are consistent with the information used in recent probabilistic seismic hazard studies accepted by NRC staff.  If new data, such as new seismic sources and new ground motion attenuation relationships, are consistent with the existing earth science database, updating or modification of the information used in the site-specific hazard analysis is not required.  It will be necessary to update seismic sources and ground motion attenuation relationships for sites where there is significant new information provided by the site investigation.
thick depositsHowever, several significant tectonic structures exist and some of these have been


Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-2The following are to be evaluated for seismic source characterization:*Evaluation of seismic source location and geometry (location and extent, both surface andsubsurface). This evaluation will normally require interpretations of available geological, geophysical, and seismological data in the source region by multiple experts or a team of experts.
interpreted as seismogenic sources (e.g., the New Madrid fault zone, Nemaha Ridge, and Meers fault).
In the CEUS, it is most likely that the determination of the properties of the seismogenic source, whether it is a tectonic structure or a broad areal source zone, will be inferred rather than demonstrated


The evaluation should include interpretations of the seismic potential of each source and relationships among seismic sources in the region to express uncertainty in the evaluations.
by strong correlations with seismicity or geologic data. Moreover, it is not generally known what


Seismic source evaluations generally develop four types of sources:  (1) fault sources, (2) area sources representing concentrated historic seismicity not associated with known tectonic structure, (3) area sources representing geographic regions with similar tectonic histories, type of crust, and structural features, and (4) background sources.  Background sources are generally used to express uncertainty in the overall seismic source configuration interpreted for the site region.  Acceptable approaches for evaluating and characterizing uncertainties for input to a seismic hazard calculation are contained in NUREG/CR-6372 (Ref. C.2).*Evaluations of earthquake recurrence for each seismic source, including recurrence rate andrecurrence model.  These evaluations normally draw most heavily on historical and instrumental seismicity associated with each source and paleoearthquake information.  Preferred methods and approaches for evaluating and characterizing uncertainty in earthquake recurrence generally will depend on the type of source.  Acceptable methods are described in NUREG/CR-6372 (Ref.
relationships exist between observed tectonic structures in a seismic source within the CEUS and the


C.2).*Evaluations of the maximum earthquake magnitude for each seismic source.  These evaluationswill draw on a broad range of source-specific tectonic characteristics, including tectonic history and available seismicity data.  Uncertainty in this evaluation should normally be expressed as a maximum magnitude distribution.  Preferred methods and information for evaluating and characterizing maximum earthquakes for seismic sources vary with the type of source.
current earthquake activity that may be associated with that source.  The historical seismicity record, the


Acceptable methods are contained in NUREG/CR-6372 (Ref. C.2).*Other evaluations, depending on the geologic setting of a site, such as local faults that have ahistory of Quaternary (last 1.8 million years) displacements, sense of slip on faults, fault length and width, area of faults, age of displacements, estimated displacement per event, estimated earthquake magnitude per offset event, orientations of regional tectonic stresses with respect to faults, and the possibility of seismogenic folds.  Capable tectonic sources are not always exposed at the ground surface (such as blind thrust faults) in the WUS as demonstrated by the buried reverse causative faults of the 1983 Coalinga, 1988 Whittier Narrows, l989 Loma Prieta, and
results of regional and site studies, and expert judgment play key roles in characterizing a source zone.
1994 Northridge earthquakes.  These examples emphasize the need to conduct thorough investigations not only at the ground surface but also in the subsurface to identify structures at seismogenic depths.  Regional topographic features should also be closely studied. Whenever faults or other structures are encountered at a site (including sites in the CEUS) in either outcrop or excavations, it is necessary to perform adequately detailed specific investigations to determine whether or not they are seismogenic or may cause surface deformation at the site. Acceptable methods for performing these investigations are contained in NUREG/CR-5503 (Ref. C.3).  
 
Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-3C.2.Investigations To Evaluate Seismic SourcesC.2.1GeneralInvestigations of the site and region around the site are necessary to identify capable tectonicsources and to determine their potential for generating earthquakes and causing surface deformation. If it is determined that surface deformation need not be taken into account at the site, sufficient data to clearly justify this determination should be presented in the application for an early site permit or license.
If, on the other hand, strong correlations and data exist suggesting a relationship between seismicity and
 
seismic sources, approaches used for more active tectonic regions can be applied.  Reference C.1 may be
 
used to assess potential for large earthquakes.
 
The primary objective of geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations is to develop an up-to-date, site-specific earth science database that supports site characterization and a site-specific
 
PSHA.  The results of these investigations will also be used to assess whether new data and their
 
interpretation are consistent with the information used in recent probabilistic seismic hazard studies
 
accepted by NRC staff.  If new data, such as new seismic sources and new ground motion attenuation
 
relationships, are consistent with the existing earth science database, updating or modification of the
 
information used in the site-specific hazard analysis is not required.  It will be necessary to update
 
seismic sources and ground motion attenuation relationships for sites where there is significant new
 
information provided by the site investigation.
 
Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-2 The following are to be evaluated for seismic source characterization:*Evaluation of seismic source location and geometry (location and extent, both surface and subsurface).  This evaluation will normally require interpretations of available geological, geophysical, and seismological data in the source region by multiple experts or a team of experts.
 
The evaluation should include interpretations of the seismic potential of each source and
 
relationships among seismic sources in the region to express uncertainty in the evaluations.
 
Seismic source evaluations generally develop four types of sources:  (1) fault sources, (2) area
 
sources representing concentrated historic seismicity not associated with known tectonic
 
structure, (3) area sources representing geographic regions with similar tectonic histories, type of
 
crust, and structural features, and (4) background sources.  Background sources are generally
 
used to express uncertainty in the overall seismic source configuration interpreted for the site
 
region.  Acceptable approaches for evaluating and characterizing uncertainties for input to a
 
seismic hazard calculation are contained in NUREG/CR-6372 (Ref. C.2).*Evaluations of earthquake recurrence for each seismic source, including recurrence rate and recurrence model.  These evaluations normally draw most heavily on historical and instrumental
 
seismicity associated with each source and paleoearthquake information.  Preferred methods and
 
approaches for evaluating and characterizing uncertainty in earthquake recurrence generally will
 
depend on the type of source.  Acceptable methods are described in NUREG/CR-6372 (Ref.
 
C.2).*Evaluations of the maximum earthquake magnitude for each seismic source.  These evaluations will draw on a broad range of source-specific tectonic characteristics, including tectonic history
 
and available seismicity data.  Uncertainty in this evaluation should normally be expressed as a
 
maximum magnitude distribution.  Preferred methods and information for evaluating and
 
characterizing maximum earthquakes for seismic sources vary with the type of source.
 
Acceptable methods are contained in NUREG/CR-6372 (Ref. C.2).*Other evaluations, depending on the geologic setting of a site, such as local faults that have a history of Quaternary (last 1.8 million years) displacements, sense of slip on faults, fault length
 
and width, area of faults, age of displacements, estimated displacement per event, estimated
 
earthquake magnitude per offset event, orientations of regional tectonic stresses with respect to
 
faults, and the possibility of seismogenic folds.  Capable tectonic sources are not always exposed
 
at the ground surface (such as blind thrust faults) in the WUS as demonstrated by the buried
 
reverse causative faults of the 1983 Coalinga, 1988 Whittier Narrows, l989 Loma Prieta, and
 
1994 Northridge earthquakes.  These examples emphasize the need to conduct thorough
 
investigations not only at the ground surface but also in the subsurface to identify structures at
 
seismogenic depths.  Regional topographic features should also be closely studie
 
====d. Whenever====
 
faults or other structures are encountered at a site (including sites in the CEUS) in either outcrop
 
or excavations, it is necessary to perform adequately detailed specific investigations to determine
 
whether or not they are seismogenic or may cause surface deformation at the sit
 
====e. Acceptable====
 
methods for performing these investigations are contained in NUREG/CR-5503 (Ref. C.3).  
Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-3C.2.Investigations To Evaluate Seismic SourcesC.2.1General Investigations of the site and region around the site are necessary to identify capable tectonic sources and to determine their potential for generating earthquakes and causing surface deformatio
 
====n. If it====
 
is determined that surface deformation need not be taken into account at the site, sufficient data to clearly
 
justify this determination should be presented in the application for an early site permit or license.


Generally, any tectonic deformation at the earth's surface within the Site Area [8 km (5 mi)of the site]
Generally, any tectonic deformation at the earth's surface within the Site Area [8 km (5 mi)of the site]
will require detailed examination to determine its significance.  Potentially active tectonic deformation within the seismogenic zone beneath a site will have to be assessed using geological, geophysical and seismological methods to determine its significance.  Engineering solutions are generally available to mitigate the potential vibratory effects of earthquakes through design.  However, engineering solutions cannot always be demonstrated to be adequate for mitigation of the effects of permanent ground displacement phenomena such as surface faulting or folding, subsidence, or ground collapse.  For this reason, it is prudent to select an alternative site when the potential exists for permanent ground displacement at the proposed site (Ref. C.4).The level of detail for investigations should be governed by knowledge of the current and lateQuaternary tectonic regime and the geological complexity of the site and region.  The investigations for determining seismic sources should be carried out in all the following levels, with areas described by radii of 320 km (200 mi) (Site Region), 40 km (25 mi) (Site Vicinity), and 8 km (5 mi) (Site Area) and 1 km (0.6 mi) (Site Location) from the site.  The investigations should provide increasingly detailed information as they proceed from the regional level down to the site (e.g., from Site Region to Site Location).  Whenever faults or other structures are encountered at a site in either outcrop or excavations, it is necessary to perform many of the investigations described below to determine whether or not they are capable tectonic sources.C.2.1.1  Site Region Investigations [within radii of 320 km (200 mi) - 40 km (25 mi) of the site]The Site Region investigations should be planned to identify seismic sources and describe theQuaternary tectonic regime.  The data should have a resolution consistent with a map developed at a scale of 1:500,000 or larger.  The investigations are not expected to be extensive or in detail, but should include a comprehensive literature review supplemented by focused geological reconnaissances based on the results of the literature study (including topographic, geologic, aeromagnetic, and gravity maps, and airphotos).  Some detailed investigations at specific locations within the region may be necessary if potential seismic sources that may be significant for determining the safe shutdown earthquake ground motion (SSE) are identified.The large size of the area for the regional investigations is necessary because of the possibilitythat all significant seismic sources, or alternative configurations, may not have been captured or enveloped by existing PSHA source databases.  Thus, the large area will increase the chances of (1)
identifying evidence for unknown seismic sources that might extend close enough for earthquake ground motions generated by that source to affect the site, and (2) confirming the PSHA's database.


Furthermore, because of the relative rarity of seismic activity in the CEUS, the area should be large enough to include as many historical and instrumentally recorded earthquakes for analysis as reasonably possibleThe specified area of study is expected to be large enough to incorporate any previously identified sources that could be analogous to sources that may underlie or be relatively close to the site.
will require detailed examination to determine its significance.  Potentially active tectonic deformation
 
within the seismogenic zone beneath a site will have to be assessed using geological, geophysical and
 
seismological methods to determine its significance.  Engineering solutions are generally available to
 
mitigate the potential vibratory effects of earthquakes through design.  However, engineering solutions
 
cannot always be demonstrated to be adequate for mitigation of the effects of permanent ground
 
displacement phenomena such as surface faulting or folding, subsidence, or ground collaps
 
====e. For this====
 
reason, it is prudent to select an alternative site when the potential exists for permanent ground
 
displacement at the proposed site (Ref. C.4).
The level of detail for investigations should be governed by knowledge of the current and late Quaternary tectonic regime and the geological complexity of the site and region.  The investigations for
 
determining seismic sources should be carried out in all the following levels, with areas described by
 
radii of 320 km (200 mi) (Site Region), 40 km (25 mi) (Site Vicinity), and 8 km (5 mi) (Site Area) and 1
 
km (0.6 mi) (Site Location) from the site.  The investigations should provide increasingly detailed
 
information as they proceed from the regional level down to the site (e.g., from Site Region to Site
 
Location)Whenever faults or other structures are encountered at a site in either outcrop or excavations, it is necessary to perform many of the investigations described below to determine whether or not they
 
are capable tectonic sources.
 
C.2.1.1  Site Region Investigations [within radii of 320 km (200 mi) - 40 km (25 mi) of the site]
The Site Region investigations should be planned to identify seismic sources and describe the Quaternary tectonic regime.  The data should have a resolution consistent with a map developed at a
 
scale of 1:500,000 or larger.  The investigations are not expected to be extensive or in detail, but should
 
include a comprehensive literature review supplemented by focused geological reconnaissances based on


In past licensing activities for sites in the CEUS, it has often been necessary, because of the absence of datable horizons overlying bedrock, to extend investigations out many tens or hundreds of kilometers Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-4from the site along a structure or to an outlying analogous structure to locate overlying datable strata orunconformities so that geochronological methods could be applied.  This procedure has also been used to estimate the age of an undatable seismic source in the Site Vicinity by relating its time of last activity to that of a similar, previously evaluated structure, or a known tectonic episode, the evidence of which may be many tens or hundreds of kilometers away.It is necessary to evaluate the geological, seismological, and geophysical data obtained from thesite-specific investigations to demonstrate that the data are sufficient and consistent with the PSHA
the results of the literature study (including topographic, geologic, aeromagnetic, and gravity maps, and
methodology.  Specifically, the evaluation may need to include (but is not limited to) seismic source characterization, ground motion attenuation relationships and other PSHA-related contents (such as low- magnitude threshold and magnitude conversion relationships).  If new information identified by the site- specific investigations were to result in a significant increase in the hazard estimate for a site, and if this new information were validated by a strong technical basis, the PSHA might have to be modified to incorporate the new technical information.  Using sensitivity studies, it may also be possible to justify a lower hazard estimate with an exceptionally strong technical basis.  However, it is expected that large uncertainties in estimating seismic hazard in the CEUS will continue to exist in the future, and substantial delays in the licensing process will result from trying to justify a lower value with respect to a specific site.C.2.1.2  Site Vicinity Investigations [within radii of 40 km (25 mi) - 8 km (5 mi) of the site]Reconnaissance-level investigations, which may need to be supplemented at specific locations bymore detailed explorations such as geologic mapping, geophysical surveying, borings, and trenching, should be conducted for the Site Vicinity; the data should have a resolution consistent with a map developed at a scale of 1:50,000 or larger.C.2.1.3  Site Area Investigations [within radii of 8 km (5 mi) - 1 km (0.6 mi) of the site]Detailed investigations should be carried out within the Site Area, and the resulting data shouldhave a resolution consistent with a map developed at a scale of 1:5,000 or larger.  The level of investigations should be in sufficient detail to delineate the geology and the potential for tectonic deformation at or near the ground surface.  The investigations should use the methods described in the following subsections that are appropriate for the tectonic regime to characterize seismic sources.The areas of investigations may be asymmetrical and may cover larger areas than those describedabove in regions of late Quaternary activity, regions with high rates of historical seismic activity (felt or instrumentally recorded data), or sites that are located near a capable tectonic source such as a fault zone.


Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-5C.2.2Contents of Site Vicinity and Site Area InvestigationsThe following methods are suggested but they are not all-inclusive and investigations should notbe limited to them.  Some procedures will not be applicable to every site, and situations will occur that require investigations that are not included in the following discussion.  It is anticipated that new technologies will be available in the future that will be applicable to these investigations.C.2.2.1  Surface InvestigationsSurface exploration to assess the geology and geologic structure of the Site Area is dependent onthe Site Location and may be carried out with the use of any appropriate combination of the geological, geophysical, seismological, and geotechnical engineering techniques summarized in the following paragraphs.  However, it is not necessary for all of these methods to be carried out at a given site.C.2.2.1.1Geological interpretations should be performed of aerial photographs and otherremote-sensing imagery, as appropriate for the particular site conditions, to assist in identifying rock outcrops, faults and other tectonic features, fracture traces, geologic contacts, lineaments, soil conditions, and evidence of landslides or soil liquefaction.C.2.2.1.2Mapping topographic, geomorphic, and hydrologic features should be performedat scales and with contour intervals suitable for analysis and descriptions of stratigraphy (particularly Quaternary), surface tectonic structures such as fault zones, and Quaternary geomorphic features.  For coastal sites, or sites located near lakes or rivers, this includes topography, geomorphology (particularly mapping marine and fluvial terraces), bathymetry, submarine landslides, geophysics (such as seismic reflection), and hydrographic surveys to the extent needed to describe the site area features.C.2.2.1.3Vertical crustal movements should be evaluated using (1) geodetic landsurveying and (2) geological analyses (such as analysis of regional dissection and degradation patterns),
airphotos).  Some detailed investigations at specific locations within the region may be necessary if
shorelines, fluvial adjustments (such as changes in stream longitudinal profiles or terraces), and other long-term changes (such as elevation changes across lava flows).C.2.2.1.4Analysis should be performed to determine the tectonic significance of offset,displaced, or anomalous landforms such as displaced stream channels or changes in stream profiles or the upstream migration of knickpoints; abrupt changes in fluvial deposits or terraces; changes in paleo- channels across a fault; or uplifted, down-dropped, or laterally displaced marine terraces.C.2.2.1.5Analysis should be performed to determine the tectonic significance ofQuaternary sedimentary deposits within or near tectonic zones, such as fault zones, including (1) fault- related or fault-controlled deposits such as sag ponds, graben fill deposits, and colluvial wedges formed by the erosion of a fault paleo-scarp and (2) non-fault-related, but offset, deposits such as alluvial fans, debris cones, fluvial terrace, and lake shoreline deposits.C.2.2.1.6Identification and analysis should be performed of deformation features causedby vibratory ground motions, including seismically induced liquefaction features (sand boils, explosion craters, lateral spreads, settlement, soil flows), mud volcanoes, landslides, rockfalls, deformed lake deposits or soil horizons, shear zones, cracks, or fissures.


Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-6C.2.2.1.7Analysis should be performed of fault displacements, including the interpretionof the morphology of topographic fault scarps associated with or produced by surface rupture.  Fault scarp morphology is useful in estimating the age of last displacement [in conjunction with the appropriate geochronological methods described in NUREG/CR-5562 (Ref. C.5)], approximate magnitude of the associated earthquake, recurrence intervals, slip rate, and the nature of the causative fault at depth.C.2.2.2  Subsurface Investigation ContentsSubsurface investigations at the site to identify and describe potential seismic sources and toobtain required geotechnical information are described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. C.6).  The investigations include, but may not be confined to, the following.C.2.2.2.1Geophysical investigations useful in the past include magnetic and gravitysurveys, seismic reflection and seismic refraction surveys, bore-hole geophysics, electrical surveys, and ground-penetrating radar surveys.C.2.2.2.2Core borings to map subsurface geology and obtain samples for testing such asdetermining the properties of the subsurface soils and rocks and geochronological analysis.C.2.2.2.3Excavating and logging of trenches across geological features to obtain samplesfor the geochronological analysis of those features.C.2.2.2.4At some sites, deep unconsolidated material/soil, bodies of water, or othermaterial may obscure geologic evidence of past activity along a tectonic structure.  In such cases, the analysis of evidence elsewhere along the structure can be used to evaluate its characteristics in the vicinity of the site.In the CEUS it may not be possible to reasonably demonstrate the age of youngest activity on atectonic structure with adequate deterministic certainty.  In such cases, the uncertainty should be quantified; the NRC staff will accept evaluations using the methods described in NUREG/CR-5503 (Ref.
potential seismic sources that may be significant for determining the safe shutdown earthquake ground


C.3).  A demonstrated tectonic association of such structures with geologic structural features or tectonic processes that are geologically old (at least pre-Quaternary) should be acceptable as an age indicator in the absence of conflicting evidence.C.2.3Site Location Investigations [within 1 km (0.6 mi)]Data from Site Location investigations should have a resolution consistent with a map developedat a scale of 1:500 or larger.  Important aspects of the site investigations are the excavation and logging of exploratory trenches and the mapping of the excavations for the plant structures, particularly those that are characterized as Seismic Category I.  In addition to geological, geophysical, and seismological investigations, detailed geotechnical engineering investigations as described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. C.6), should be conducted at the site.
motion (SSE) are identified.


Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-7C.2.4Surface-Fault Rupture and Associated Deformation at the SiteSites that have a potential for fault rupture at or near the ground surface and associateddeformation should be avoided.  Where it is determined that surface deformation need not be taken into account, sufficient data or detailed studies to reasonably support the determination should be presented.
The large size of the area for the regional investigations is necessary because of the possibility that all significant seismic sources, or alternative configurations, may not have been captured or


The presence or absence of Quaternary faulting at the site needs to be evaluated to determine whether there is a potential hazard that is caused by surface faultingThe potential for surface fault rupture should be characterized by evaluating (1) the location and geometry of faults relative to the site, (2) the nature and amount of displacement (sense of slip, cumulative slip, slip per event, and nature and extent of related folding and/or secondary faulting), and (3) the likelihood of displacement during some future period of concern (recurrence interval, slip rate, and elapsed time since the most recent displacement).
enveloped by existing PSHA source databasesThus, the large area will increase the chances of (1)
Acceptable methods and approaches for conducting these evaluations are described in NUREG/CR-5503 (Ref. C.3); acceptable geochronology dating methods are described in NUREG/CR-5562 (Ref. C.5).For assessing the potential for fault displacement, the details of the spatial pattern of the faultzone (e.g., the complexity of fault traces, branches, and en echelon patterns) may be important as they may define the particular locations where fault displacement may be expected in the future.  The amount of slip that might be expected to occur can be evaluated directly based on paleoseismic investigations or it can be estimated indirectly based on the magnitude of the earthquake that the fault can generate.Both non-tectonic and tectonic deformation can pose a substantial hazard to a nuclear powerplant, but there are likely to be differences in the approaches used to resolve the issues raised by the two types of phenomena.  Therefore, non-tectonic deformation should be distinguished from tectonic deformation at a site.  In past nuclear power plant licensing activities, surface displacements caused by phenomena other than tectonic phenomena have been confused with tectonically induced faulting.  Non- tectonic structures are those found in karst terrain and those resulting from growth faulting.  The nature of faults related to collapse features can usually be defined through geotechnical investigations and can either be avoided or, if feasible, adequate engineering fixes can be provided.Glacially induced faults generally do not represent a deep-seated seismic or fault displacementhazard because the conditions that created them are no longer present.  However, residual stresses from Pleistocene glaciation may still be present in glaciated regions, although they are of less concern than active tectonically induced stresses.  These features should be investigated with respect to their relationship to current in situ stresses.Large, naturally occurring growth faults as those found in the coastal plain of Texas andLouisiana can pose a surface displacement hazard, even though offset most likely occurs at a much less rapid rate than that of tectonic faults.  They are not regarded as having the capacity to generate damaging vibratory ground motion, can often be identified and avoided in siting, and their displacements can be monitored.  Some growth faults and antithetic faults related to growth faults and fault zones should be investigated in regions where growth faults are known to be present.  Local human-induced growth faulting can be monitored and controlled or avoided.If questionable features cannot be demonstrated to be of non-tectonic origin, they should betreated as tectonic deformation.


Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-8C.2.5Site Geotechnical Investigations and EvaluationsC.2.5.1  Geotechnical InvestigationsThe geotechnical investigations should include, but not necessarily be limited to, (1) defining sitesoil and near-surface geologic strata properties as may be required for hazard evaluations, engineering analyses, and seismic design; (2) evaluating the effects of local soil and site geologic strata on ground motion at the ground surface; (3) evaluating dynamic properties of the near-surface soils and geologic strata; (4) conducting soil-structure interaction analyses; and (5) assessing the potential for soil failure or deformation induced by ground shaking (liquefaction, differential compaction, and land sliding).Subsurface conditions should be investigated by means of borings, soundings, well logs,exploratory excavations, sampling, geophysical methods (e.g., cross-hole, down-hole, and geophysical logging) that adequately assess soil and ground-water conditions and other methods described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. C.6).  Appropriate investigations should be made to determine the contribution of the subsurface soils and rocks to the loads imposed on the structures.A laboratory testing program should be carried out to identify and classify the subsurface soilsand rocks and to determine their physical and engineering properties.  Laboratory investigations and testing practices acceptable to the NRC staff are described in Regulatory Guide 1.138 (Ref. C.7).  
identifying evidence for unknown seismic sources that might extend close enough for earthquake ground
Laboratory tests for both static and dynamic properties (e.g., shear modulus, damping, liquefaction resistance, etc.) are generally required.  The dynamic property tests should include cyclic triaxial tests, cyclic simple shear tests, cyclic torsional shear tests, and resonant column tests, as appropriate.  Both static and dynamic tests should be conducted as recommended in American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards or test procedures acceptable to the staff.  The ASTM specification numbers for static and dynamic laboratory tests can be found in the annual books of ASTM Standards, Volume 04.08.  Sufficient laboratory test data should be obtained to allow for reasonable assessments of mean values of soil properties and their potential variability.C.2.5.2  Ground Failure EvaluationsLiquefaction is a soil behavior phenomenon in which cohesionless soils (sand, silt, or gravel)under saturated conditions lose a substantial part or all of their strength because of high pore water pressures generated in the soils by strong ground motions induced by earthquakes. Potential effects of liquefaction include reduction in foundation bearing capacity, settlements, land sliding and lateral movements, flotation of lightweight structures (such as tanks) embedded in the liquefied soil, and increased lateral pressures on walls retaining liquefied soil.  Guidance in Regulatory Guide 1.198,
 
motions generated by that source to affect the site, and (2) confirming the PSHA's database.
 
Furthermore, because of the relative rarity of seismic activity in the CEUS, the area should be large
 
enough to include as many historical and instrumentally recorded earthquakes for analysis as reasonably
 
possible.  The specified area of study is expected to be large enough to incorporate any previously
 
identified sources that could be analogous to sources that may underlie or be relatively close to the site.
 
In past licensing activities for sites in the CEUS, it has often been necessary, because of the absence of
 
datable horizons overlying bedrock, to extend investigations out many tens or hundreds of kilometers Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-4 from the site along a structure or to an outlying analogous structure to locate overlying datable strata or unconformities so that geochronological methods could be applied.  This procedure has also been used to
 
estimate the age of an undatable seismic source in the Site Vicinity by relating its time of last activity to
 
that of a similar, previously evaluated structure, or a known tectonic episode, the evidence of which may
 
be many tens or hundreds of kilometers away.
 
It is necessary to evaluate the geological, seismological, and geophysical data obtained from the site-specific investigations to demonstrate that the data are sufficient and consistent with the PSHA
 
methodology.  Specifically, the evaluation may need to include (but is not limited to) seismic source
 
characterization, ground motion attenuation relationships and other PSHA-related contents (such as low-
 
magnitude threshold and magnitude conversion relationships).  If new information identified by the site-
 
specific investigations were to result in a significant increase in the hazard estimate for a site, and if this
 
new information were validated by a strong technical basis, the PSHA might have to be modified to
 
incorporate the new technical information.  Using sensitivity studies, it may also be possible to justify a
 
lower hazard estimate with an exceptionally strong technical basis.  However, it is expected that large
 
uncertainties in estimating seismic hazard in the CEUS will continue to exist in the future, and
 
substantial delays in the licensing process will result from trying to justify a lower value with respect to a
 
specific site.
 
C.2.1.2  Site Vicinity Investigations [within radii of 40 km (25 mi) - 8 km (5 mi) of the site]
Reconnaissance-level investigations, which may need to be supplemented at specific locations by more detailed explorations such as geologic mapping, geophysical surveying, borings, and trenching, should be conducted for the Site Vicinity; the data should have a resolution consistent with a map
 
developed at a scale of 1:50,000 or larger.
 
C.2.1.3  Site Area Investigations [within radii of 8 km (5 mi) - 1 km (0.6 mi) of the site]
Detailed investigations should be carried out within the Site Area, and the resulting data should have a resolution consistent with a map developed at a scale of 1:5,000 or large
 
====r. The level of====
 
investigations should be in sufficient detail to delineate the geology and the potential for tectonic
 
deformation at or near the ground surface.  The investigations should use the methods described in the
 
following subsections that are appropriate for the tectonic regime to characterize seismic sources.
 
The areas of investigations may be asymmetrical and may cover larger areas than those described above in regions of late Quaternary activity, regions with high rates of historical seismic activity (felt or
 
instrumentally recorded data), or sites that are located near a capable tectonic source such as a fault zone.
 
Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-5C.2.2Contents of Site Vicinity and Site Area Investigations The following methods are suggested but they are not all-inclusive and investigations should not be limited to them.  Some procedures will not be applicable to every site, and situations will occur that
 
require investigations that are not included in the following discussion.  It is anticipated that new
 
technologies will be available in the future that will be applicable to these investigations.
 
C.2.2.1  Surface Investigations Surface exploration to assess the geology and geologic structure of the Site Area is dependent on the Site Location and may be carried out with the use of any appropriate combination of the geological, geophysical, seismological, and geotechnical engineering techniques summarized in the following
 
paragraphs.  However, it is not necessary for all of these methods to be carried out at a given site.
 
C.2.2.1.1 Geological interpretations should be performed of aerial photographs and other remote-sensing imagery, as appropriate for the particular site conditions, to assist in identifying rock
 
outcrops, faults and other tectonic features, fracture traces, geologic contacts, lineaments, soil conditions, and evidence of landslides or soil liquefaction.
 
C.2.2.1.2 Mapping topographic, geomorphic, and hydrologic features should be performed at scales and with contour intervals suitable for analysis and descriptions of stratigraphy (particularly
 
Quaternary), surface tectonic structures such as fault zones, and Quaternary geomorphic feature
 
====s.  For====
 
coastal sites, or sites located near lakes or rivers, this includes topography, geomorphology (particularly
 
mapping marine and fluvial terraces), bathymetry, submarine landslides, geophysics (such as seismic
 
reflection), and hydrographic surveys to the extent needed to describe the site area features.
 
C.2.2.1.3 Vertical crustal movements should be evaluated using (1) geodetic land surveying and (2) geological analyses (such as analysis of regional dissection and degradation patterns),
shorelines, fluvial adjustments (such as changes in stream longitudinal profiles or terraces), and other
 
long-term changes (such as elevation changes across lava flows).
C.2.2.1.4 Analysis should be performed to determine the tectonic significance of offset, displaced, or anomalous landforms such as displaced stream channels or changes in stream profiles or the
 
upstream migration of knickpoints; abrupt changes in fluvial deposits or terraces; changes in paleo-
 
channels across a fault; or uplifted, down-dropped, or laterally displaced marine terraces.
 
C.2.2.1.5 Analysis should be performed to determine the tectonic significance of Quaternary sedimentary deposits within or near tectonic zones, such as fault zones, including (1) fault-
 
related or fault-controlled deposits such as sag ponds, graben fill deposits, and colluvial wedges formed
 
by the erosion of a fault paleo-scarp and (2) non-fault-related, but offset, deposits such as alluvial fans, debris cones, fluvial terrace, and lake shoreline deposits.
 
C.2.2.1.6 Identification and analysis should be performed of deformation features caused by vibratory ground motions, including seismically induced liquefaction features (sand boils, explosion
 
craters, lateral spreads, settlement, soil flows), mud volcanoes, landslides, rockfalls, deformed lake
 
deposits or soil horizons, shear zones, cracks, or fissures.
 
Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-6 C.2.2.1.7 Analysis should be performed of fault displacements, including the interpretion of the morphology of topographic fault scarps associated with or produced by surface ruptur
 
====e. Fault====
 
scarp morphology is useful in estimating the age of last displacement [in conjunction with the appropriate
 
geochronological methods described in NUREG/CR-5562 (Ref. C.5)], approximate magnitude of the
 
associated earthquake, recurrence intervals, slip rate, and the nature of the causative fault at depth.
 
C.2.2.2  Subsurface Investigation Contents Subsurface investigations at the site to identify and describe potential seismic sources and to obtain required geotechnical information are described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. C.6).  The
 
investigations include, but may not be confined to, the following.
 
C.2.2.2.1 Geophysical investigations useful in the past include magnetic and gravity surveys, seismic reflection and seismic refraction surveys, bore-hole geophysics, electrical surveys, and
 
ground-penetrating radar surveys.
 
C.2.2.2.2 Core borings to map subsurface geology and obtain samples for testing such as determining the properties of the subsurface soils and rocks and geochronological analysis.
 
C.2.2.2.3 Excavating and logging of trenches across geological features to obtain samples for the geochronological analysis of those features.
 
C.2.2.2.4 At some sites, deep unconsolidated material/soil, bodies of water, or other material may obscure geologic evidence of past activity along a tectonic structure.  In such cases, the
 
analysis of evidence elsewhere along the structure can be used to evaluate its characteristics in the
 
vicinity of the site.
 
In the CEUS it may not be possible to reasonably demonstrate the age of youngest activity on a tectonic structure with adequate deterministic certainty.  In such cases, the uncertainty should be
 
quantified; the NRC staff will accept evaluations using the methods described in NUREG/CR-5503 (Ref.
 
C.3).  A demonstrated tectonic association of such structures with geologic structural features or tectonic
 
processes that are geologically old (at least pre-Quaternary) should be acceptable as an age indicator in
 
the absence of conflicting evidence.C.2.3Site Location Investigations
[within 1 km (0.6 mi)]
Data from Site Location investigations should have a resolution consistent with a map developed at a scale of 1:500 or larger.  Important aspects of the site investigations are the excavation and logging
 
of exploratory trenches and the mapping of the excavations for the plant structures, particularly those that
 
are characterized as Seismic Category I.  In addition to geological, geophysical, and seismological
 
investigations, detailed geotechnical engineering investigations as described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. C.6), should be conducted at the site.
 
Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-7C.2.4Surface-Fault Rupture and Associated Deformation at the Site Sites that have a potential for fault rupture at or near the ground surface and associated deformation should be avoided.  Where it is determined that surface deformation need not be taken into
 
account, sufficient data or detailed studies to reasonably support the determination should be presented.
 
The presence or absence of Quaternary faulting at the site needs to be evaluated to determine whether
 
there is a potential hazard that is caused by surface faulting.  The potential for surface fault rupture
 
should be characterized by evaluating (1) the location and geometry of faults relative to the site, (2) the
 
nature and amount of displacement (sense of slip, cumulative slip, slip per event, and nature and extent of
 
related folding and/or secondary faulting), and (3) the likelihood of displacement during some future
 
period of concern (recurrence interval, slip rate, and elapsed time since the most recent displacement).
 
Acceptable methods and approaches for conducting these evaluations are described in NUREG/CR-5503 (Ref. C.3); acceptable geochronology dating methods are described in NUREG/CR-5562 (Ref. C.5).
For assessing the potential for fault displacement, the details of the spatial pattern of the fault zone (e.g., the complexity of fault traces, branches, and en echelon patterns) may be important as they
 
may define the particular locations where fault displacement may be expected in the futur
 
====e. The amount====
 
of slip that might be expected to occur can be evaluated directly based on paleoseismic investigations or
 
it can be estimated indirectly based on the magnitude of the earthquake that the fault can generate.
 
Both non-tectonic and tectonic deformation can pose a substantial hazard to a nuclear power plant, but there are likely to be differences in the approaches used to resolve the issues raised by the two
 
types of phenomena.  Therefore, non-tectonic deformation should be distinguished from tectonic
 
deformation at a site.  In past nuclear power plant licensing activities, surface displacements caused by
 
phenomena other than tectonic phenomena have been confused with tectonically induced faulting.  Non-
 
tectonic structures are those found in karst terrain and those resulting from growth faultin
 
====g. The nature====
 
of faults related to collapse features can usually be defined through geotechnical investigations and can
 
either be avoided or, if feasible, adequate engineering fixes can be provided.
 
Glacially induced faults generally do not represent a deep-seated seismic or fault displacement hazard because the conditions that created them are no longer present.  However, residual stresses from
 
Pleistocene glaciation may still be present in glaciated regions, although they are of less concern than
 
active tectonically induced stresses.  These features should be investigated with respect to their
 
relationship to current in situ stresses.
 
Large, naturally occurring growth faults as those found in the coastal plain of Texas and Louisiana can pose a surface displacement hazard, even though offset most likely occurs at a much less
 
rapid rate than that of tectonic faults.  They are not regarded as having the capacity to generate damaging
 
vibratory ground motion, can often be identified and avoided in siting, and their displacements can be
 
monitored.  Some growth faults and antithetic faults related to growth faults and fault zones should be
 
investigated in regions where growth faults are known to be present.  Local human-induced growth
 
faulting can be monitored and controlled or avoided.
 
If questionable features cannot be demonstrated to be of non-tectonic origin, they should be treated as tectonic deformation.
 
Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-8C.2.5Site Geotechnical Investigations and Evaluations C.2.5.1  Geotechnical Investigations The geotechnical investigations should include, but not necessarily be limited to, (1) defining site soil and near-surface geologic strata properties as may be required for hazard evaluations, engineering
 
analyses, and seismic design; (2) evaluating the effects of local soil and site geologic strata on ground
 
motion at the ground surface; (3) evaluating dynamic properties of the near-surface soils and geologic
 
strata; (4) conducting soil-structure interaction analyses; and (5) assessing the potential for soil failure or
 
deformation induced by ground shaking (liquefaction, differential compaction, and land sliding).
Subsurface conditions should be investigated by means of borings, soundings, well logs, exploratory excavations, sampling, geophysical methods (e.g., cross-hole, down-hole, and geophysical
 
logging) that adequately assess soil and ground-water conditions and other methods described in
 
Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. C.6).  Appropriate investigations should be made to determine the
 
contribution of the subsurface soils and rocks to the loads imposed on the structures.
 
A laboratory testing program should be carried out to identify and classify the subsurface soils and rocks and to determine their physical and engineering properties.  Laboratory investigations and
 
testing practices acceptable to the NRC staff are described in Regulatory Guide 1.138 (Ref. C.7).  
 
Laboratory tests for both static and dynamic properties (e.g., shear modulus, damping, liquefaction
 
resistance, etc.) are generally required.  The dynamic property tests should include cyclic triaxial tests, cyclic simple shear tests, cyclic torsional shear tests, and resonant column tests, as appropriat
 
====e.  Both====
 
static and dynamic tests should be conducted as recommended in American Society for Testing and
 
Materials (ASTM) standards or test procedures acceptable to the staff.  The ASTM specification
 
numbers for static and dynamic laboratory tests can be found in the annual books of ASTM Standards, Volume 04.08.  Sufficient laboratory test data should be obtained to allow for reasonable assessments of
 
mean values of soil properties and their potential variability.
 
C.2.5.2  Ground Failure Evaluations Liquefaction is a soil behavior phenomenon in which cohesionless soils (sand, silt, or gravel)
under saturated conditions lose a substantial part or all of their strength because of high pore water
 
pressures generated in the soils by strong ground motions induced by earthquake
 
====s. Potential effects of====
 
liquefaction include reduction in foundation bearing capacity, settlements, land sliding and lateral
 
movements, flotation of lightweight structures (such as tanks) embedded in the liquefied soil, and
 
increased lateral pressures on walls retaining liquefied soil.  Guidance in Regulatory Guide 1.198,
"Procedures and Criteria for Assessing Seismic Soil Liquefaction at Nuclear Power Plant Sites," (Ref.
"Procedures and Criteria for Assessing Seismic Soil Liquefaction at Nuclear Power Plant Sites," (Ref.


C.8), should be used for evaluating the site for liquefaction potential.Investigations of liquefaction potential typically involve both geological and geotechnicalengineering assessments.  The parameters controlling liquefaction phenomena are (1) the lithology of the soil at the site, (2) the ground water conditions, (3) the behavior of the soil under dynamic loadings, and
C.8), should be used for evaluating the site for liquefaction potential.
(4) the potential severity of the vibratory ground motion.In addition to liquefaction, a number of other forms of ground failure or ground settlementshould be investigated.  These forms of ground failure and ground settlement include localized soft zones, karst features, seismic settlement of non-saturated soils, all forms of mass wasting, and any other form of ground deformation that has the capacity to impact foundation performance or design.
 
Investigations of liquefaction potential typically involve both geological and geotechnical engineering assessments.  The parameters controlling liquefaction phenomena are (1) the lithology of the
 
soil at the site, (2) the ground water conditions, (3) the behavior of the soil under dynamic loadings, and
 
(4) the potential severity of the vibratory ground motion.
 
In addition to liquefaction, a number of other forms of ground failure or ground settlement should be investigated.  These forms of ground failure and ground settlement include localized soft
 
zones, karst features, seismic settlement of non-saturated soils, all forms of mass wasting, and any other
 
form of ground deformation that has the capacity to impact foundation performance or design.
 
Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-9C.3Evaluation of New Information Obtained from the Site-specific Investigations The first step in reviewing the new information obtained from the site-specific investigations with previous interpretations is determining whether the following existing parameters are consistent
 
with the new information:  (1) the range of seismogenic sources as interpreted by the seismicity experts
 
or teams involved in the study, (2) the range of seismicity rates for the region around the site as
 
interpreted by the seismicity experts or teams involved in the studies, (3) the range of maximum
 
magnitudes determined by the seismicity experts or teams, and (4) attenuation relation


Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-9C.3Evaluation of New Information Obtained from the Site-specific InvestigationsThe first step in reviewing the new information obtained from the site-specific investigationswith previous interpretations is determining whether the following existing parameters are consistent with the new information:  (1) the range of seismogenic sources as interpreted by the seismicity experts or teams involved in the study, (2) the range of seismicity rates for the region around the site as interpreted by the seismicity experts or teams involved in the studies, (3) the range of maximum magnitudes determined by the seismicity experts or teams, and (4) attenuation relations.  The new information is considered not significant and no further evaluation is needed if it is consistent with the assumptions used in the PSHA, no additional alternative seismic sources or seismic parameters are needed, or it supports maintaining the site mean seismic hazard.APPENDIX C REFERENCESC.1Electric Power Research Institute, "The Earthquakes of Stable Continental Regions," Volume 1: Assessment of Large Earthquake Potential, EPRI TR-102261-V1, 1994.C.2Budnitz, R.J., et al., "Recommendations for Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis:  Guidance onUncertainty and Use of Experts," NUREG/CR-6372, Volumes 1 and 2, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, April 1997.C.3Hanson, K.L., et al., "Techniques for Identifying Faults and Determining Their Origins,"NUREG/CR-5503, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, 1999.C.4International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), "Earthquakes and Associated Topics in Relation toNuclear Power Plant Siting," Safety Series No. 50-SG-S1, Revision 1, 1991.C.5Sowers, J.M., et al., "Dating and Earthquakes:  Review of Quaternary Geochronology and ItsApplication to Paleoseismology," NUREG/CR-5562, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, 1998.C.6Regulatory Guide 1.132, "Site Investigations for Foundations of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S.Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.C.7Regulatory Guide 1.138, "Laboratory Investigations of Soils and Rocks for Engineering Analysisand Design of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.C.8Regulatory Guide 1.198, "Procedures and Criteria for Assessing Seismic Soil Liquefaction atNuclear Power Plant Sites," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.
====s. The new====
 
information is considered not significant and no further evaluation is needed if it is consistent with the
 
assumptions used in the PSHA, no additional alternative seismic sources or seismic parameters are
 
needed, or it supports maintaining the site mean seismic hazard.
 
APPENDIX C REFERENCESC.1Electric Power Research Institute, "The Earthquakes of Stable Continental Regions," Volume 1:  
Assessment of Large Earthquake Potential, EPRI TR-102261-V1, 1994.C.2Budnitz, R.J., et al., "Recommendations for Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis:  Guidance on Uncertainty and Use of Experts," NUREG/CR-6372, Volumes 1 and 2, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory
 
Commission, Washington, DC, April 1997.C.3Hanson, K.L., et al., "Techniques for Identifying Faults and Determining Their Origins,"
NUREG/CR-5503, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, 1999.C.4International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), "Earthquakes and Associated Topics in Relation to Nuclear Power Plant Siting," Safety Series No. 50-SG-S1, Revision 1, 1991.C.5Sowers, J.M., et al., "Dating and Earthquakes:  Review of Quaternary Geochronology and Its Application to Paleoseismology," NUREG/CR-5562, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, 1998.C.6Regulatory Guide 1.132, "Site Investigations for Foundations of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S.
 
Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.C.7Regulatory Guide 1.138, "Laboratory Investigations of Soils and Rocks for Engineering Analysis and Design of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.C.8Regulatory Guide 1.198, "Procedures and Criteria for Assessing Seismic Soil Liquefaction at Nuclear Power Plant Sites," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.
 
Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-1 APPENDIX D
DEVELOPMENT OF SEISMIC HAZARD INFORMATION BASE AND
DETERMINATION OF CONTROLLING EARTHQUAKESD.1Introduction This appendix discusses site-specific development of seismic hazard levels and elaborates on methods to meet the goals discussed in Regulatory Position 3 of this regulatory guid
 
====e. This appendix====
 
describes a methods for undertaking probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA), performing
 
deaggregation of the results of the PSHA, and determining the controlling earthquakes that are developed
 
for comparison with identified local and regional seismic sources.  The controlling earthquakes can also
 
be used to develop appropriate ground motions for the site response analysis.  The deaggregation of the
 
mean probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA) results determines the contribution of individual
 
magnitude and distance ranges to the overall seismic hazard.  Information from the deaggregation is
 
useful to both review the PSHA and understand the seismic sources that contribute most to hazard at the
 
site.The controlling earthquakes are developed from the deaggregation of the PSHA results at ground motion levels corresponding to the annual frequencies of 1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06 and are based on the
 
magnitude and distance values that contribute most the to hazard at the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz and the
 
average of 5 and 10 Hz.  While the ASCE/SEI Standard 43-05 (Ref. D.2) approach only requires
 
calculation of ground motion levels with mean annual probabilities of 1 E-04 and 1 E-05, NRC


Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-1APPENDIX DDEVELOPMENT OF SEISMIC HAZARD INFORMATION BASE ANDDETERMINATION OF CONTROLLING EARTHQUAKESD.1IntroductionThis appendix discusses site-specific development of seismic hazard levels and elaborates onmethods to meet the goals discussed in Regulatory Position 3 of this regulatory guide.  This appendix describes a methods for undertaking probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA), performing deaggregation of the results of the PSHA, and determining the controlling earthquakes that are developed for comparison with identified local and regional seismic sources.  The controlling earthquakes can also be used to develop appropriate ground motions for the site response analysis.  The deaggregation of the mean probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA) results determines the contribution of individual magnitude and distance ranges to the overall seismic hazard.  Information from the deaggregation is useful to both review the PSHA and understand the seismic sources that contribute most to hazard at the site.The controlling earthquakes are developed from the deaggregation of the PSHA results at groundmotion levels corresponding to the annual frequencies of 1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06 and are based on the magnitude and distance values that contribute most the to hazard at the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz and the average of 5 and 10 Hz.  While the ASCE/SEI Standard 43-05 (Ref. D.2) approach only requires calculation of ground motion levels with mean annual probabilities of 1 E-04 and 1 E-05, NRC
confirmatory activities also specify calculation of ground motion levels with a mean annual probability of
confirmatory activities also specify calculation of ground motion levels with a mean annual probability of
1 E-06.  Using the controlling earthquakes, Regulatory Position 4 and Appendix E to this regulatory guide describe one acceptable procedure for determining the appropriate ground motion for the site response analysis to determine the performance-based safe shutdown earthquake ground motion (SSE).D.2Probabilistic Seismic Hazard AssessmentSite-specific PSHA should be performed using the methodology described in RegulatoryPositions 3.3 and 3.4 of this regulatory guide.  Steps taken relative to the PSHA methodology are summarized as follows:*Perform the PSHA for actual or assumed rock conditions with up-to-date interpretations ofearthquake sources, earthquake recurrence, and strong ground motion estimation using original or updated sources as determined in Regulatory Positions 3.1 and 3.2.*CAV filtering can be used in place of a lower-bound magnitude cutoff (Ref. D.1).
*Conduct the hazard assessment at a minimum of 30 frequencies, approximately equally spacedon a logarithmic frequency axis between 100 and 0.1Hz.*Report fractile hazard curves at the following fractile levels (p) for each ground motionparameter:  0.05, 0.16, 0.50, 0.84, and 0.95, as well as the mean.  Report the fractile hazard curves in tabular as well as graphical format.*Determine the mean uniform hazard response spectra (UHRS) for annual exceedance frequenciesof 1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06.


1The recommended magnitude and distance bins and procedure used to establish controlling earthquakes weredeveloped for application in the CEUS, where the nearby earthquakes generally control the response in the 5 to 10 Hz frequency range, and larger but distant events can control the lower frequency range.  For other situations, alternative binning schemes as well as a study of contributions from various bins are necessary to identify controlling earthquakes,consistent with the distribution of the seismicity.Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-2D.3Deaggregation of PSHA ResultsDeaggregation is undertaken as a way to better understand the earthquakes that contribute most to hazardat the site of interest.  It is also used to assess the reasonableness of the PSHA results and is further used to develop controlling earthquakes as described in the section below.  Deaggregation can be performed using the following steps.Deaggregation Step 1(a)Using the annual probability levels of 1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06, determine the ground motionlevels for the spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz from the total mean hazard obtained in Step 1.(b)Calculate the linear average of the ground motion level for the 1 and 2.5 Hz and the 5 and 10 Hzspectral acceleration pairs.Deaggregation Step 2Perform a deaggregation of the PSHA for each of the spectral accelerations and annualprobability levels as enumerated in Step 1, and provide a table (such as illustrated in Table D.11) for eachof the 12 cases.  The deaggregation is performed to obtain the relative contribution to the hazard for each of the magnitude-distance bins for each case.Table D.1Recommended Magnitude and Distance BinsMoment Magnitude Range of BinsDistanceRange of Bin (km)5 - 5.55.5 - 66 - 6.56.5 - 7>70 - 1515 - 25
1 E-06.  Using the controlling earthquakes, Regulatory Position 4 and Appendix E to this regulatory
25 - 5050 - 100100 - 200
 
guide describe one acceptable procedure for determining the appropriate ground motion for the site
 
response analysis to determine the performance-based safe shutdown earthquake ground motion (SSE).D.2Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Assessment Site-specific PSHA should be performed using the methodology described in Regulatory Positions 3.3 and 3.4 of this regulatory guide.  Steps taken relative to the PSHA methodology are
 
summarized as follows:*Perform the PSHA for actual or assumed rock conditions with up-to-date interpretations of earthquake sources, earthquake recurrence, and strong ground motion estimation using original
 
or updated sources as determined in Regulatory Positions 3.1 and 3.2.*CAV filtering can be used in place of a lower-bound magnitude cutoff (Ref. D.1).
*Conduct the hazard assessment at a minimum of 30 frequencies, approximately equally spaced on a logarithmic frequency axis between 100 and 0.1Hz.*Report fractile hazard curves at the following fractile levels (p) for each ground motion parameter:  0.05, 0.16, 0.50, 0.84, and 0.95, as well as the mean.  Report the fractile hazard
 
curves in tabular as well as graphical format.*Determine the mean uniform hazard response spectra (UHRS) for annual exceedance frequencies of 1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06.
 
1The recommended magnitude and distance bins and procedure used to establish controlling earthquakes weredeveloped for application in the CEUS, where the nearby earthquakes generally control the response in the 5 to 10 Hz frequency range, and larger but distant events can control the lower frequency range.  For other situations, alternative binning schemes as well as a study of contributions from various bins are necessary to identify controlling earthquakes,consistent with the distribution of the seismicity.Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-2D.3Deaggregation of PSHA Results Deaggregation is undertaken as a way to better understand the earthquakes that contribute most to hazard at the site of interest.  It is also used to assess the reasonableness of the PSHA results and is further used
 
to develop controlling earthquakes as described in the section below.  Deaggregation can be performed
 
using the following steps.
 
Deaggregation Step 1(a)Using the annual probability levels of 1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06, determine the ground motion levels for the spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz from the total mean hazard obtained in
 
Step 1.(b)Calculate the linear average of the ground motion level for the 1 and 2.5 Hz and the 5 and 10 Hz spectral acceleration pairs.
 
Deaggregation Step 2 Perform a deaggregation of the PSHA for each of the spectral accelerations and annual probability levels as enumerated in Step 1, and provide a table (such as illustrated in Table D.1
1) for each of the 12 cases.  The deaggregation is performed to obtain the relative contribution to the hazard for each
 
of the magnitude-distance bins for each case.
 
Table D.1 Recommended Magnitude and Distance Bins Moment Magnitude Range of Bins Distance Range of Bin (km)5 - 5.55.5 - 66 - 6.56.5 - 7>7
0 - 15 15 - 25
25 - 50 50 - 100 100 - 200
200 - 300>300  
200 - 300>300  
Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-3Deaggregation Step 3If the deaggregated results for each of the 12 cases is not in terms of the fractional contribution tothe total hazard then perform the steps as described below.  Otherwise, average the low-frequency (1 and
Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-3 Deaggregation Step 3 If the deaggregated results for each of the 12 cases is not in terms of the fractional contribution to the total hazard then perform the steps as described below.  Otherwise, average the low-frequency (1 and
2.5 Hz) and high-frequency (5 and 10 Hz) deaggregation results.From the deaggregated results of Step 2, the mean annual probability of exceeding the groundmotion levels of Step 2(a) (spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz) are determined for each magnitude-distance bin.  These values are denoted by H mdf.Using Hmdf values, the fractional contribution of each magnitude and distance bin to the totalhazard for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, P(m,d)1, is computed according to the following:P(m,d)1 = [(    Hmdf ) / 2 ]  ÷  [    (    Hmdf ) / 2 ](Equation 1)                   f = 1,2                         m  d    f = 1,2where f = 1 and f = 2 represent the ground motion measure at 1 and 2.5 Hz, respectively.The fractional contribution of each magnitude and distance bin to the total hazard for the averageof 5 and 10 Hz, P(m,d)2, is computed according to the following:P(m,d)2 = [(    Hmdf ) / 2 ]  ÷  [    (    Hmdf ) / 2 ](Equation 2)                               f = 1,2                         m  d    f = 1,2where f = 1 and f = 2 represent the ground motion measure at 5 and 10 Hz, respectively.
 
2.5 Hz) and high-frequency (5 and 10 Hz) deaggregation results.
 
From the deaggregated results of Step 2, the mean annual probability of exceeding the ground motion levels of Step 2(a) (spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz) are determined for each
 
magnitude-distance bin.  These values are denoted by H
mdf.Using H mdf values, the fractional contribution of each magnitude and distance bin to the total hazard for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, P(m,d)
1 , is computed according to the following:
P(m,d)1 = [(    H mdf ) / 2 ]  ÷  [    (    H mdf ) / 2 ](Equation 1)
 
f = 1,2 m  d    f = 1,2 where f = 1 and f = 2 represent the ground motion measure at 1 and 2.5 Hz, respectively.
 
The fractional contribution of each magnitude and distance bin to the total hazard for the average of 5 and 10 Hz, P(m,d)
2 , is computed according to the following:
P(m,d)2 = [(    H mdf ) / 2 ]  ÷  [    (    H mdf ) / 2 ](Equation 2)            
                  f = 1,2
 
m  d    f = 1,2 where f = 1 and f = 2 represent the ground motion measure at 5 and 10 Hz, respectively.
 
Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-4D.4Procedure To Determine Controlling Earthquakes The following approach is acceptable to the NRC staff for determining controlling earthquakes which are used by the staff to assess the reasonableness of the PSHA results and can be used for the site
 
response analyses.  This procedure is based on a deaggregation of the mean probabilistic seismic hazard
 
in terms of earthquake magnitudes and distances.  When the controlling earthquakes have been obtained, the site specific earthquake ground motion can be developed according to the simplified procedures
 
described in Appendix E.  The SSE response spectrum is then determined according to the procedures
 
described in Regulatory Position 5.
 
Step 1 for Determining Controlling Earthquakes Review the magnitude-distance distribution for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz to determine whether the contribution to the hazard for distances of 100 kilometer (km) (63 mi) or greater is substantial (on the
 
order of 5 percent or greater).
If the contribution to the hazard for distances of 100 km (63 mi) or greater exceeds 5 percent, additional calculations are needed to determine the controlling earthquakes using the magnitude-distance
 
distribution for distances greater than 100 km (63 mi).  This distribution, P > 100 (m,d)
1 , is defined by the following:
P > 100 (m,d)
1 = [ P(m,d)
1 ] ÷ [        P(m,d)
1 ](Equation 3)
 
m  d > 100 The purpose of this calculation is to identify a distant, larger event that may control low-frequency content of a response spectrum.
 
The distance of 100 km (63 mi) is chosen for CEUS sites.  However, for all sites the results of full magnitude-distance distribution should be carefully examined to ensure that proper controlling
 
earthquakes are clearly identified.
 
Step 2 for Determining Controlling Earthquakes Calculate the mean magnitude and distance of the controlling earthquake associated with the ground motions determined in Step 1 of the deaggregation (above) for the average of 5 and 10 H
 
====z.  The====
 
following relation is used to calculate the mean magnitude using results of the entire magnitude-distance
 
bins matrix:
M c (5 - 10 Hz) =    m  P(m,d)2 (Equation 4)
  m        d where m is the central magnitude value for each magnitude bin.
 
The mean distance of the controlling earthquake is determined using results of the entire magnitude-distance bins matrix:
Ln {D c (5 - 10 Hz)}  =  Ln(d)  P(m,d)2 (Equation 5)
 
d m where d is the centroid distance value for each distance bin.
 
Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-5 Step 3 for Determining Controlling Earthquakes If the contribution to the hazard calculated in Step 5 for distances of 100 km (63 mi) or greater exceeds 5 percent for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, calculate the mean magnitude and distance of the
 
controlling earthquakes associated with the ground motions determined in Step 2 for the average of 1 and
 
2.5 Hz.  The following relation is used to calculate the mean magnitude using calculations based on
 
magnitude-distance bins greater than distances of 100 km (63 mi) as discussed in Step 1:
M c (1 - 2.5 Hz) =    m      P > 100 (m,d)
1 (Equation 6)
    m    d > 100 where m is the central magnitude value for each magnitude bin.
 
The mean distance of the controlling earthquake is based on magnitude-distance bins greater than distances of 100 km (63 mi) as discussed in Step 5 and determined according to the following:
Ln {D c (1 - 2.5 Hz)} =      Ln(d)      P > 100 (m,d)
2 (Equation 7)
 
d > 100               
m where d is the centroid distance value for each distance bin.
 
When more than one earthquake magnitude-distance pair contributes significantly to the spectral accelerations at a given frequency, it may be necessary to use more than one controlling earthquake for


Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-4D.4Procedure To Determine Controlling EarthquakesThe following approach is acceptable to the NRC staff for determining controlling earthquakeswhich are used by the staff to assess the reasonableness of the PSHA results and can be used for the site response analyses.  This procedure is based on a deaggregation of the mean probabilistic seismic hazard in terms of earthquake magnitudes and distances.  When the controlling earthquakes have been obtained, the site specific earthquake ground motion can be developed according to the simplified procedures described in Appendix E.  The SSE response spectrum is then determined according to the procedures described in Regulatory Position 5.Step 1 for Determining Controlling EarthquakesReview the magnitude-distance distribution for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz to determine whetherthe contribution to the hazard for distances of 100 kilometer (km) (63 mi) or greater is substantial (on the order of 5 percent or greater).If the contribution to the hazard for distances of 100 km (63 mi) or greater exceeds 5 percent,additional calculations are needed to determine the controlling earthquakes using the magnitude-distance distribution for distances greater than 100 km (63 mi).  This distribution, P > 100 (m,d)1, is defined bythe following:P > 100 (m,d)1 = [ P(m,d)1 ] ÷ [        P(m,d)1 ](Equation 3)            m  d > 100The purpose of this calculation is to identify a distant, larger event that may controllow-frequency content of a response spectrum.The distance of 100 km (63 mi) is chosen for CEUS sites.  However, for all sites the results offull magnitude-distance distribution should be carefully examined to ensure that proper controlling earthquakes are clearly identified.Step 2 for Determining Controlling EarthquakesCalculate the mean magnitude and distance of the controlling earthquake associated with theground motions determined in Step 1 of the deaggregation (above) for the average of 5 and 10 Hz.  The following relation is used to calculate the mean magnitude using results of the entire magnitude-distance bins matrix:Mc (5 - 10 Hz) =    m  P(m,d)2(Equation 4)  m        dwhere m is the central magnitude value for each magnitude bin.The mean distance of the controlling earthquake is determined using results of the entiremagnitude-distance bins matrix:Ln {Dc (5 - 10 Hz)}  =  Ln(d)  P(m,d)2(Equation 5)            d            mwhere d is the centroid distance value for each distance bin.
determining the spectral response at the frequency.


Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-5Step 3 for Determining Controlling EarthquakesIf the contribution to the hazard calculated in Step 5 for distances of 100 km (63 mi) or greaterexceeds 5 percent for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, calculate the mean magnitude and distance of the controlling earthquakes associated with the ground motions determined in Step 2 for the average of 1 and
Step 4 for Determining Controlling Earthquakes Document the high- and low-frequency controlling earthquakes for each target annual probability of exceedance in the tabular form illustrated in Table D.2.
2.5 Hz.  The following relation is used to calculate the mean magnitude using calculations based on magnitude-distance bins greater than distances of 100 km (63 mi) as discussed in Step 1:Mc (1 - 2.5 Hz) =    m      P > 100 (m,d)1(Equation 6)    m    d > 100where m is the central magnitude value for each magnitude bin.The mean distance of the controlling earthquake is based on magnitude-distance bins greater thandistances of 100 km (63 mi) as discussed in Step 5 and determined according to the following:Ln {Dc (1 - 2.5 Hz)} =      Ln(d)      P > 100 (m,d)2(Equation 7)          d > 100                mwhere d is the centroid distance value for each distance bin.When more than one earthquake magnitude-distance pair contributes significantly to the spectralaccelerations at a given frequency, it may be necessary to use more than one controlling earthquake for determining the spectral response at the frequency.Step 4 for Determining Controlling EarthquakesDocument the high- and low-frequency controlling earthquakes for each target annual probabilityof exceedance in the tabular form illustrated in Table D.2.


2Copies may be purchased from the American Society for Civil Engineers (ASCE), 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston,VA 20190 [phone:  800-548-ASCE (2723)].  Purchase information is available through the ASCE Web site at http://www.asce.org/bookstore/book.cfm?isbn=0784407622Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-6Table D.2High- and Low-Frequency Controlling EarthquakesHazardMagnitude (mb)DistanceMean 1 E-04High-Frequency (5 and 10 Hz)Mean 1 E-04Low-Frequency (1 and 2.5 Hz)Mean 1 E-05High-Frequency (5 and 10 Hz)Mean 1 E-05Low-Frequency (1 and 2.5 Hz)Mean 1 E-06High-Frequency (5 and 10 Hz)Mean 1 E-06Low-Frequency (1 and 2.5 Hz)APPENDIX D BIBLIOGRAPHYD.1Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), and U.S. Department of Energy (DOE), "Program onTechnology Innovation:  Use of Minimum CAV in Determining Effects of Small Magnitude Earthquakes on Seismic Hazard Analyses," Report 1012965, December 2005.D.2ASCE/SEI 43-05, "Seismic Design Criteria for Structures, Systems, and Components in NuclearFacilities," American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute, 2005.2D.3Sobel.P., "Revised Livermore Seismic Hazard Estimates for Sixty-Nine Nuclear Power PlantSites East of the Rocky Mountains," NUREG-1488, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, April 1994.D.4Savy, J.B., et al., "Eastern Seismic Hazard Characterization Update," UCRL-ID-115111,Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, June 1993.D.5Bernreuter, D.L., et al., "Seismic Hazard Characterization of 69 Nuclear Plant Sites East of theRocky Mountains," NUREG/CR-5250, Volumes 1-8, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, January 1989.D.6Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), "Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Evaluations at NuclearPower Plant Sites in the Central and Eastern United States," NP-4726, All Volumes, 1989-1991.
2 Copies may be purchased from the American Society for Civil Engineers (ASCE), 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20190 [phone:  800-548-ASCE (2723)].  Purchase information is available through the ASCE Web site at  


Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-7D.7Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), "The Earthquakes of Stable Continental Regions,"Volume 1:  Assessment of Large Earthquake Potential, EPRI TR-102261-V1, 1994.D.8Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), et al., "CEUS Ground Motion Project Final Report,"Report 1009684, 2004.
http://www.asce.org/bookstore/book.cfm?isbn=0784407622Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-6 Table D.2 High- and Low-Frequency Controlling EarthquakesHazardMagnitude (m b)Distance Mean 1 E-04 High-Frequency (5 and 10 Hz)
Mean 1 E-04 Low-Frequency (1 and 2.5 Hz)
Mean 1 E-05 High-Frequency (5 and 10 Hz)
Mean 1 E-05 Low-Frequency (1 and 2.5 Hz)
Mean 1 E-06 High-Frequency (5 and 10 Hz)
Mean 1 E-06 Low-Frequency (1 and 2.5 Hz)
APPENDIX D BIBLIOGRAPHYD.1Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), and U.S. Department of Energy (DOE), "Program on Technology Innovation:  Use of Minimum CAV in Determining Effects of Small Magnitude


Appendix E to RG 1.208, Page E-1APPENDIX ESEISMIC WAVE TRANSMISSION ANALYSISE.1IntroductionThe horizontal and vertical safe shutdown earthquake ground motion (SSE) should bedetermined in the free field on the ground surface.  For sites that have materials with Vs less than theassumed generic rock shear wave velocity, as defined in the probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA), a site response analysis should be performed.  This appendix discusses the site-specific information needed for these analyses and elaborates on one of the acceptable site response methods discussed in NUREG/CR-6728 that can be used to meet the intent of Regulatory Position 4 of this regulatory guide.  The method described is a simplified approach and, as such, some sites may require more detailed analyses as described in NUREG/CR-6728.The input ground motion used in the analyses are specified based on the PSHA, which assumesthat an outcrop or a hypothetical outcrop exists at the free-field surface.  If the rock layer (as defined by shear wave velocity) first occurs at depth, the input ground motions are deconvolved to develop "within"
Earthquakes on Seismic Hazard Analyses," Report 1012965, December 2005.D.2ASCE/SEI 43-05, "Seismic Design Criteria for Structures, Systems, and Components in Nuclear Facilities," American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute, 2005.
motions and imposed at the generic rock horizon.The purpose of the method described in this appendix is to develop the uniform hazard responsespectrum (UHRS) at the free-field ground surface.  The hazard curves from the PSHA are defined for generic rock conditions as defined by the attenuation relationships used in the PSHA.  In the central and eastern united states (CEUS), rock is usually defined as that material with a shear wave velocity (Vs) ofabout 2.8 km/sec (9,200 ft/sec).  To properly address amplification or deamplification effects of the soils between the generic rock horizon, the ground surface, and other interfaces in between, the following procedure should be used:(1)Develop the site-specific soil profile.
 
2D.3Sobel.P., "Revised Livermore Seismic Hazard Estimates for Sixty-Nine Nuclear Power Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains," NUREG-1488, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, April 1994.D.4Savy, J.B., et al., "Eastern Seismic Hazard Characterization Update," UCRL-ID-115111, Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, June 1993.D.5Bernreuter, D.L., et al., "Seismic Hazard Characterization of 69 Nuclear Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains," NUREG/CR-5250, Volumes 1-8, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, January 1989.D.6Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), "Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Evaluations at Nuclear Power Plant Sites in the Central and Eastern United States," NP-4726, All Volumes, 1989-1991.
 
Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-7D.7Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), "The Earthquakes of Stable Continental Regions,"
Volume 1:  Assessment of Large Earthquake Potential, EPRI TR-102261-V1, 1994.D.8Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), et al., "CEUS Ground Motion Project Final Report,"
Report 1009684, 2004.
 
Appendix E to RG 1.208, Page E-1 APPENDIX E
SEISMIC WAVE TRANSMISSION ANALYSISE.1Introduction The horizontal and vertical safe shutdown earthquake ground motion (SSE) should be determined in the free field on the ground surface.  For sites that have materials with V
s less than the assumed generic rock shear wave velocity, as defined in the probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA), a site response analysis should be performed.  This appendix discusses the site-specific
 
information needed for these analyses and elaborates on one of the acceptable site response methods
 
discussed in NUREG/CR-6728 that can be used to meet the intent of Regulatory Position 4 of this
 
regulatory guide.  The method described is a simplified approach and, as such, some sites may require
 
more detailed analyses as described in NUREG/CR-6728.
 
The input ground motion used in the analyses are specified based on the PSHA, which assumes that an outcrop or a hypothetical outcrop exists at the free-field surface.  If the rock layer (as defined by
 
shear wave velocity) first occurs at depth, the input ground motions are deconvolved to develop "within"
 
motions and imposed at the generic rock horizon.
 
The purpose of the method described in this appendix is to develop the uniform hazard response spectrum (UHRS) at the free-field ground surface.  The hazard curves from the PSHA are defined for
 
generic rock conditions as defined by the attenuation relationships used in the PSHA.  In the central and
 
eastern united states (CEUS), rock is usually defined as that material with a shear wave velocity (V
s) of about 2.8 km/sec (9,200 ft/sec).  To properly address amplification or deamplification effects of the soils
 
between the generic rock horizon, the ground surface, and other interfaces in between, the following
 
procedure should be used:(1)Develop the site-specific soil profile.


(2)Develop appropriate modified earthquake time histories to be used in site response analyses.
(2)Develop appropriate modified earthquake time histories to be used in site response analyses.


(3)Perform a suite of site response analyses to determine mean site amplification functions for arange of frequencies.(4)Develop the UHRS at the free ground surface based on the generic rock-based PSHA and themean site amplification functions.E.2Site-Specific Soil ProfileSite and laboratory investigations and testing are performed to obtain data defining the static anddynamic engineering properties of soil and rock materials, and their spatial distribution. The procedures identified in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. E.1), Regulatory Guide 1.138 (Ref. E.2), and subsection C.2.2.2 of Appendix C to this regulatory guide are acceptable to the NRC staff.
(3)Perform a suite of site response analyses to determine mean site amplification functions for a range of frequencies.(4)Develop the UHRS at the free ground surface based on the generic rock-based PSHA and the mean site amplification functions.E.2Site-Specific Soil Profile Site and laboratory investigations and testing are performed to obtain data defining the static and dynamic engineering properties of soil and rock materials, and their spatial distributio
 
====n. The procedures====
 
identified in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. E.1), Regulatory Guide 1.138 (Ref. E.2), and subsection
 
C.2.2.2 of Appendix C to this regulatory guide are acceptable to the NRC staff.
 
Appendix E to RG 1.208, Page E-2 The seismic wave transmission characteristics (spectral amplification or deamplification) of the materials overlying bedrock at the site should be described over a range of frequencies that include the
 
significant structural frequencies.  The wave transmission characteristics should be developed for levels
 
of seismic motion ranging from those causing very small strains (i.e., no soil degradation) to those
 
consistent with strain levels anticipated in the SSE.  The following material properties should be
 
determined for each stratum under the site:  (1) thickness, (2) compressional velocity, (3) shear wave
 
velocity, (4) bulk densities, (5) soil index properties and classification, (6) shear modulus and damping
 
variations with strain level, and (7) the water table elevation and its variation throughout the site.
 
Internal friction angle, cohesive strength and over-consolidation ratio for clay are also needed for non-
 
linear analyses.  Site specific soil profiles should be deep enough to fully capture the amplification to the
 
lowest structural frequency of interest and should extend to the depth at which the input ground motion is
 
to be imposed.
 
The strain-dependent shear modulus and damping curves are developed based on site-specific testing results and supplemented as appropriate by published data for similar soil
 
====s. One source of====
 
published data is the EPRI 93 curves (Ref. E.3).  The strain-dependent shear modulus and damping
 
curves incorporated into the analysis should be justified against observed data for each soil at the site.
 
When the site-specific laboratory data are developed, the result should be compared to earthquake
 
recordings on similar soils.  A maximum critical damping value of 15 percent is allowed in site response
 
analyses.  The effects of confining pressures (that reflect the depths of the soil) on these strain-dependent
 
soil dynamic characteristics are assessed and considered in site response analyse
 
====s. The variability in====
 
these properties is accounted for in the site response analyses.
 
Often vertically propagating shear waves are the dominant contributor to free-field ground motions at a site.  In these cases, a one-dimensional equivalent-linear analysis or nonlinear analysis that
 
assumes vertical propagation of shear waves may be appropriate.  However, site characteristics (such as a
 
dipping bedrock surface or other impedance boundaries), regional characteristics (such as topographic
 
effects), and source characteristics (such as nearby dipping seismic sources) may require that analyses be
 
able to also account for inclined waves.  Multi-dimensional soil models may be needed if complex
 
geologic and geotechnical conditions exist.E.3Site Response Analysis Due to the non-linear nature of site response, the choice of input ground motions has a significant impact on the amplification of motion observed in the soil column.  One way to approach this problem is
 
to use controlling earthquakes determined from deaggregation of the PSHA results, as described in
 
Appendix D.  The controlling earthquakes are developed to focus the analyses on the types of scenarios


Appendix E to RG 1.208, Page E-2The seismic wave transmission characteristics (spectral amplification or deamplification) of thematerials overlying bedrock at the site should be described over a range of frequencies that include the significant structural frequenciesThe wave transmission characteristics should be developed for levels of seismic motion ranging from those causing very small strains (i.e., no soil degradation) to those consistent with strain levels anticipated in the SSE.  The following material properties should be determined for each stratum under the site:  (1) thickness, (2) compressional velocity, (3) shear wave velocity, (4) bulk densities, (5) soil index properties and classification, (6) shear modulus and damping variations with strain level, and (7) the water table elevation and its variation throughout the site.
most likely to impact the site.  However, for some sites additional earthquake scenarios may be needed to


Internal friction angle, cohesive strength and over-consolidation ratio for clay are also needed for non- linear analyses.  Site specific soil profiles should be deep enough to fully capture the amplification to the lowest structural frequency of interest and should extend to the depth at which the input ground motion is to be imposed.The strain-dependent shear modulus and damping curves are developed based on site-specifictesting results and supplemented as appropriate by published data for similar soils.  One source of published data is the EPRI 93 curves (Ref. E.3).  The strain-dependent shear modulus and damping curves incorporated into the analysis should be justified against observed data for each soil at the site.
adequately reflect the full UHRS, particularly in the intermediate frequency range.


When the site-specific laboratory data are developed, the result should be compared to earthquake recordings on similar soils.  A maximum critical damping value of 15 percent is allowed in site response analyses.  The effects of confining pressures (that reflect the depths of the soil) on these strain-dependent soil dynamic characteristics are assessed and considered in site response analyses.  The variability in these properties is accounted for in the site response analyses.Often vertically propagating shear waves are the dominant contributor to free-field groundmotions at a site.  In these cases, a one-dimensional equivalent-linear analysis or nonlinear analysis that assumes vertical propagation of shear waves may be appropriate.  However, site characteristics (such as a dipping bedrock surface or other impedance boundaries), regional characteristics (such as topographic effects), and source characteristics (such as nearby dipping seismic sources) may require that analyses be able to also account for inclined waves.  Multi-dimensional soil models may be needed if complex geologic and geotechnical conditions exist.E.3Site Response AnalysisDue to the non-linear nature of site response, the choice of input ground motions has a significantimpact on the amplification of motion observed in the soil column.  One way to approach this problem is to use controlling earthquakes determined from deaggregation of the PSHA results, as described in Appendix D.  The controlling earthquakes are developed to focus the analyses on the types of scenarios most likely to impact the site.  However, for some sites additional earthquake scenarios may be needed to adequately reflect the full UHRS, particularly in the intermediate frequency range.The response spectra for each of the controlling earthquakes should be developed using eitherappropriate attenuation relationships or the appropriate response spectrum from NUREG/CR-6728.  The CEUS spectral shapes described in NUREG/CR-6728 are for both a single corner and double corner source model.  These two models should be evenly weighted and accounted for in the development of the input time histories.  The resulting response spectra are then scaled to match the site rock spectral accelerations at 7.5 Hz (high-frequency), 1.75 Hz (low-frequency), and an intermediate frequency range as appropriate.
The response spectra for each of the controlling earthquakes should be developed using either appropriate attenuation relationships or the appropriate response spectrum from NUREG/CR-672


Appendix E to RG 1.208, Page E-3The fundamental frequency of the site can be approximated prior to analysis using simplifiedmethods.  Once the spectra for the input earthquakes are determined and scaled, the spectra are plotted and compared against the fundamental frequency of the soil to ensure that the spectra from at least one key earthquake scenario has sufficient energy content at the natural frequency of the site as determined by the full rock-based UHRS.  Because the non-linear behavior of the soil will decrease the fundamental frequency of the site, this comparison should be verified upon completion of the analyses.  The soil response is typically highest at the natural period of the soil.  Therefore, applying a suite of cases that are deficient in this range may not adequately predict the true site specific UHRS.  A visual comparison of the spectra from the controlling earthquakes, the UHRS spectra, and the natural frequency of the soil column should be provided.After determining the scaled response spectra from each of the input earthquakes, correspondingacceleration time histories are identified and their spectra compared to the target earthquakes spectra.
===8.   The===


The acceleration time histories are modified to match the target spectra.  The scaled time histories, which were recorded as outcrop motions, are imposed in the developed subsurface model (and are typically first converted to equivalent "within" motions at the bedrock level).  The imposed motions propagate through the analytical model of the site soils to determine the free-field surface ground motions (Regulatory Position 4.2).  Only acceleration time histories modified from recorded earthquakes are used for this purpose.  A sufficient number of time histories should be used to get reasonably consistent average results.As a minimum, the results of the site response analysis should show the input motion (rockresponse spectra), output motion (surface response spectra), and spectral amplification function (site ground motion transfer function) at the surface.  It is common practice to also provide a plot showing the peak accelerations in the soil as a function of depth.  In addition to developing the spectral amplifications functions at the surface, it is also useful to simultaneously develop the spectral amplification functions for the foundation level for use in development of the SSE.  However, because the location of the foundation is not always known at the time at which the analyses are undertaken, the functions may be determined at several depths including the deepest depth from the Plant Parameter Envelope.  In addition, determining and providing the spectral amplification functions at a variety of depths may support review of the results used in determining the soil UHRS and the SSE.Due to the non-linear nature of the analyses and the heterogeneity of the soil, sufficientlycapturing the variability of the soil response at the site requires that at least 60 randomized shear velocity profiles are paired with 60 sets of randomized shear modulus and damping curves (i.e., one shear velocity profile with one set of modulus reduction and damping curves).  The use of 60 profiles is generally adequate to determine a reliable estimate of the standard deviation of the site response.  To determine the UHRS at the free-field ground surface, the site amplification functions (spectral ratios) for each input earthquake are computed.  The mean site amplification function is obtained for each input earthquake scenario by dividing the response spectrum from the computed surface motion by the response spectrum from the input hard-rock surface motion, and computing the arithmetic mean of these 60 individual response spectral ratios.
CEUS spectral shapes described in NUREG/CR-6728 are for both a single corner and double corner


Appendix E to RG 1.208, Page E-4Once the site amplification functions are developed, they are applied to the free-field rock-basedUHRS.  To determine the site-specific soil UHRS at the free-field ground surface, for each of the annual exceedance frequencies (1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06), multiply the rock-based UHRS by either the high- or low-frequency site amplification function value at each frequency by the site amplification function that is most appropriate for that frequency.  The appropriate site amplification function is determined for each frequency based on which of the input earthquakes has a spectral value that is closest to the rock UHRS at that frequency.  At high frequencies, this will be the high-frequency spectral amplification function, and at low frequencies, the low-frequency site amplification function. By applying the appropriate (high- or low-frequency) amplification function for each frequency to the mean rock-based UHRS, the site-specific soil-based UHRS is calculated for the free ground surface.  Figure E.1 shows a comparison of the results of each of the soil amplification functions applied to the free-field rock UHRS
source model.  These two models should be evenly weighted and accounted for in the development of the
and the final free-field soil UHRS.As a minimum, the results of the site response analysis should show the input motion (rockresponse spectra), output motion (surface response spectra), and spectral amplification functions (site ground motion transfer functions) at the surface.  It is common to also provide a plot showing the peak accelerations in the soil as a function of depth.  In addition, determining and providing the spectral amplification functions at a variety of depths supports review of the results used in determining the soilUHRS and the SSE.Figure E.1.  Free-Surface Soil Uniform Hazard Response SpectraCompared to Spectra Resulting from Scaling of Mean Rock UHRSby Low- and High-Frequency Amplification Functions Appendix E to RG 1.208, Page E-5E.4Free-Field Ground Surface Uniform Hazard Response SpectraIn accordance with Regulatory Position 4.3 of this regulatory guide, the UHRS at the free-fieldground surface is determined to form the basis of the SSE.  In the method detailed above, the UHRS for the site is developed by scaling the appropriate UHRS at the rock surface by the appropriate mean site amplification function developed for either the low- and high-frequency range
 
input time histories.  The resulting response spectra are then scaled to match the site rock spectral
 
accelerations at 7.5 Hz (high-frequency), 1.75 Hz (low-frequency), and an intermediate frequency range
 
as appropriate.
 
Appendix E to RG 1.208, Page E-3 The fundamental frequency of the site can be approximated prior to analysis using simplified methods.  Once the spectra for the input earthquakes are determined and scaled, the spectra are plotted
 
and compared against the fundamental frequency of the soil to ensure that the spectra from at least one
 
key earthquake scenario has sufficient energy content at the natural frequency of the site as determined
 
by the full rock-based UHRS.  Because the non-linear behavior of the soil will decrease the fundamental
 
frequency of the site, this comparison should be verified upon completion of the analyse
 
====s. The soil====
 
response is typically highest at the natural period of the soil.  Therefore, applying a suite of cases that are
 
deficient in this range may not adequately predict the true site specific UHRS.  A visual comparison of
 
the spectra from the controlling earthquakes, the UHRS spectra, and the natural frequency of the soil
 
column should be provided.
 
After determining the scaled response spectra from each of the input earthquakes, corresponding acceleration time histories are identified and their spectra compared to the target earthquakes spectra.
 
The acceleration time histories are modified to match the target spectra.  The scaled time histories, which
 
were recorded as outcrop motions, are imposed in the developed subsurface model (and are typically first
 
converted to equivalent "within" motions at the bedrock level).  The imposed motions propagate through
 
the analytical model of the site soils to determine the free-field surface ground motions (Regulatory
 
Position 4.2).  Only acceleration time histories modified from recorded earthquakes are used for this
 
purpose.  A sufficient number of time histories should be used to get reasonably consistent average
 
results.As a minimum, the results of the site response analysis should show the input motion (rock response spectra), output motion (surface response spectra), and spectral amplification function (site
 
ground motion transfer function) at the surface.  It is common practice to also provide a plot showing the
 
peak accelerations in the soil as a function of depth.  In addition to developing the spectral amplifications
 
functions at the surface, it is also useful to simultaneously develop the spectral amplification functions
 
for the foundation level for use in development of the SSE.  However, because the location of the
 
foundation is not always known at the time at which the analyses are undertaken, the functions may be
 
determined at several depths including the deepest depth from the Plant Parameter Envelope.  In addition, determining and providing the spectral amplification functions at a variety of depths may support review
 
of the results used in determining the soil UHRS and the SSE.
 
Due to the non-linear nature of the analyses and the heterogeneity of the soil, sufficiently capturing the variability of the soil response at the site requires that at least 60 randomized shear velocity
 
profiles are paired with 60 sets of randomized shear modulus and damping curves (i.e., one shear velocity
 
profile with one set of modulus reduction and damping curves).  The use of 60 profiles is generally
 
adequate to determine a reliable estimate of the standard deviation of the site respons
 
====e. To determine the====
 
UHRS at the free-field ground surface, the site amplification functions (spectral ratios) for each input
 
earthquake are computed.  The mean site amplification function is obtained for each input earthquake
 
scenario by dividing the response spectrum from the computed surface motion by the response spectrum
 
from the input hard-rock surface motion, and computing the arithmetic mean of these 60 individual
 
response spectral ratios.
 
Appendix E to RG 1.208, Page E-4 Once the site amplification functions are developed, they are applied to the free-field rock-based UHRS.  To determine the site-specific soil UHRS at the free-field ground surface, for each of the annual
 
exceedance frequencies (1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06), multiply the rock-based UHRS by either the high-
 
or low-frequency site amplification function value at each frequency by the site amplification function
 
that is most appropriate for that frequency.  The appropriate site amplification function is determined for
 
each frequency based on which of the input earthquakes has a spectral value that is closest to the rock
 
UHRS at that frequency.  At high frequencies, this will be the high-frequency spectral amplification
 
function, and at low frequencies, the low-frequency site amplification functio
 
====n. By applying the====
 
appropriate (high- or low-frequency) amplification function for each frequency to the mean rock-based
 
UHRS, the site-specific soil-based UHRS is calculated for the free ground surface.  Figure E.1 shows a
 
comparison of the results of each of the soil amplification functions applied to the free-field rock UHRS
 
and the final free-field soil UHRS.
 
As a minimum, the results of the site response analysis should show the input motion (rock response spectra), output motion (surface response spectra), and spectral amplification functions (site
 
ground motion transfer functions) at the surface.  It is common to also provide a plot showing the peak
 
accelerations in the soil as a function of depth.  In addition, determining and providing the spectral
 
amplification functions at a variety of depths supports review of the results used in determining the soil UHRS and the SSE.
 
Figure E.1.  Free-Surface Soil Uniform Hazard Response Spectra Compared to Spectra Resulting from Scaling of Mean Rock UHRS
by Low- and High-Frequency Amplification Functions Appendix E to RG 1.208, Page E-5E.4Free-Field Ground Surface Uniform Hazard Response Spectra In accordance with Regulatory Position 4.3 of this regulatory guide, the UHRS at the free-field ground surface is determined to form the basis of the SSE.  In the method detailed above, the UHRS for
 
the site is developed by scaling the appropriate UHRS at the rock surface by the appropriate mean site
 
amplification function developed for either the low- and high-frequency range


====s. These smooth UHRS====
====s. These smooth UHRS====
are used in Regulatory Position 5 of this regulatory guide to develop the performance-based horizontal and vertical response spectra.APPENDIX E REFERENCESE.1Regulatory Guide 1.132, "Site Investigations for Foundations of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S.Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.E.2Regulatory Guide 1.138, "Laboratory Investigations of Soils and Rocks for Engineering Analysisand Design of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.E.3Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), "Guidelines for Determining Design-Basis GroundMotions," EPRI TR-102293, Palo Alto, California, 1993.


Appendix F to RG-1.208, Page F-1APPENDIX FCRITERIA FOR DEVELOPING TIME HISTORIESThis appendix provides criteria for developing and evaluating modified ground motions used forsoil response.  Actual recorded earthquake ground motion or modified recorded ground motions should be used for the site response analysis.  Synthetic motions that are not based on seed recorded time histories should not be used.The general objective is to generate a modified recorded accelerogram that achievesapproximately a mean-based fit to the target spectrum.  That is, the average ratio of the spectral acceleration calculated from the accelerogram to the target, where the ratio is calculated frequency by frequency, is only slightly greater than one.  The aim is to achieve an accelerogram that does not have significant gaps in the Fourier amplitude spectrum, but which is not biased high with respect to the target.
are used in Regulatory Position 5 of this regulatory guide to develop the performance-based horizontal
 
and vertical response spectra.
 
APPENDIX E REFERENCESE.1Regulatory Guide 1.132, "Site Investigations for Foundations of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S.
 
Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.E.2Regulatory Guide 1.138, "Laboratory Investigations of Soils and Rocks for Engineering Analysis and Design of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.E.3Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), "Guidelines for Determining Design-Basis Ground Motions," EPRI TR-102293, Palo Alto, California, 1993.
 
Appendix F to RG-1.208, Page F-1 APPENDIX F
CRITERIA FOR DEVELOPING TIME HISTORIES
This appendix provides criteria for developing and evaluating modified ground motions used for soil response.  Actual recorded earthquake ground motion or modified recorded ground motions should
 
be used for the site response analysis.  Synthetic motions that are not based on seed recorded time
 
histories should not be used.
 
The general objective is to generate a modified recorded accelerogram that achieves approximately a mean-based fit to the target spectrum.  That is, the average ratio of the spectral
 
acceleration calculated from the accelerogram to the target, where the ratio is calculated frequency by
 
frequency, is only slightly greater than one.  The aim is to achieve an accelerogram that does not have
 
significant gaps in the Fourier amplitude spectrum, but which is not biased high with respect to the target.
 
Time histories biased high with respect to a spectral target may overdrive (overestimate damping and
 
stiffness reduction) a site soil column or structure when nonlinear effects are importan
 
====t. Ground motions====
 
or sets of ground motions that are generated to "match" or "envelop" given design response spectral
 
shapes should comply with the following six steps:(1)The time history should have a sufficiently small time increment and sufficiently long durations.
 
Time histories should have a Nyquist frequency of at least 50 Hz (e.g., a time increment of at
 
most 0.010 seconds) and a total duration of 20 seconds.  If frequencies higher than 50 Hz are of
 
interest, the time increment of the record must be suitably reduced to provide a Nyquist
 
frequency (N
y = 1/(2 t), where t = time increment) above the maximum frequency of interest.
 
The total duration of the record can be increased by zero packing to satisfy these frequency
 
criteria.(2)Spectral accelerations at 5 percent damping are computed at a minimum of 100 points per frequency decade, uniformly spaced over the log frequency scale from 0.1 Hz to 50 Hz or the
 
Nyquist frequency.  If the target response spectrum is defined in the frequency range from 0.2 Hz
 
to 25 Hz, the comparison of the modified motion response spectrum with the target spectrum is
 
made at each frequency computed in this frequency range.(3)The computed 5 percent damped response spectrum of the average of all accelerograms should not fall more than 10 percent below the target spectrum at any one frequenc
 
====y. To prevent spectra====
 
in large frequency windows from falling below the target spectrum, the spectra within a
 
frequency window of no larger than +/- 10 percent centered on the frequency should be allowed to
 
fall below the target spectrum.  This corresponds to spectra at no more than nine adjacent
 
frequency points defined in (2) above from falling below the target spectrum.(4)The mean of the 5 percent damped response spectra should not exceed the target spectrum at any frequency by more than 30 percent (a factor of 1.3) in the frequency range between 0.2 Hz and
 
25 Hz.  If the spectrum for the accelerogram exceeds the target spectrum by more than 30 percent
 
at any frequency in this frequency range, the power spectral density of the accelerogram needs to
 
be computed and shown to not have significant gaps in energy at any frequency over the
 
frequency range.  An additional check over the 0.2 to 25 Hz frequency range is that the mean
 
ratio (ratio of the average record value to the target value) be greater than 1.0.
 
1The directional correlation coefficient is a measure of the degree of linear relationship between two earthquakeaccelerograms.  For accelerograms X and Y, the directional correlation coefficient is given by the following equation:
 
n                  _            _ x y  = { (1 / n) (        [ (X
i  - x ) (Y
i  - y) ] ) }  ÷  {  x  y }                                                                            i  = 1                                                                                                                      _        _where n is the number of discrete acceleration-time data points, x and y are the mean values, and  x and  y are thestandard deviations of X and Y, respectively.Appendix F to RG 1.208, Page F-2(5)Because of the high variability in time domain characteristics of recorded earthquakes of similar magnitudes and at similar distances, strict time domain criteria are not recommended.  However, modified motions defined as described above should typically have durations (defined by the 5
 
percent to 75 percent Arias intensity), and ratios V/A and AD/V
2 (A, V, and D are peak ground acceleration, ground velocity, and ground displacement, respectively), which are generally


Time histories biased high with respect to a spectral target may overdrive (overestimate damping and stiffness reduction) a site soil column or structure when nonlinear effects are important.  Ground motions or sets of ground motions that are generated to "match" or "envelop" given design response spectral shapes should comply with the following six steps:(1)The time history should have a sufficiently small time increment and sufficiently long durations. Time histories should have a Nyquist frequency of at least 50 Hz (e.g., a time increment of at most 0.010 seconds) and a total duration of 20 seconds.  If frequencies higher than 50 Hz are of interest, the time increment of the record must be suitably reduced to provide a Nyquist frequency (Ny = 1/(2 t), where t = time increment) above the maximum frequency of interest. The total duration of the record can be increased by zero packing to satisfy these frequency criteria.(2)Spectral accelerations at 5 percent damping are computed at a minimum of 100 points perfrequency decade, uniformly spaced over the log frequency scale from 0.1 Hz to 50 Hz or the Nyquist frequency.  If the target response spectrum is defined in the frequency range from 0.2 Hz to 25 Hz, the comparison of the modified motion response spectrum with the target spectrum is made at each frequency computed in this frequency range.(3)The computed 5 percent damped response spectrum of the average of all accelerograms shouldnot fall more than 10 percent below the target spectrum at any one frequency.  To prevent spectra in large frequency windows from falling below the target spectrum, the spectra within a frequency window of no larger than +/- 10 percent centered on the frequency should be allowed to fall below the target spectrum.  This corresponds to spectra at no more than nine adjacent frequency points defined in (2) above from falling below the target spectrum.(4)The mean of the 5 percent damped response spectra should not exceed the target spectrum at anyfrequency by more than 30 percent (a factor of 1.3) in the frequency range between 0.2 Hz and
consistent with characteristic values for the magnitude and distance of the appropriate controlling
25 Hz.  If the spectrum for the accelerogram exceeds the target spectrum by more than 30 percent at any frequency in this frequency range, the power spectral density of the accelerogram needs to be computed and shown to not have significant gaps in energy at any frequency over the frequency range.  An additional check over the 0.2 to 25 Hz frequency range is that the mean ratio (ratio of the average record value to the target value) be greater than 1.0.


1The directional correlation coefficient is a measure of the degree of linear relationship between two earthquakeaccelerograms.  For accelerograms X and Y, the directional correlation coefficient is given by the following equation:                                                                              n                  _            _ x y  = { (1 / n) (        [ (X i  - x ) (Y i  - y) ] ) }  ÷  {  x  y }                                                                            i  = 1                                                                                                                      _        _where n is the number of discrete acceleration-time data points, x and y are the mean values, and  x and  y are thestandard deviations of X and Y, respectively.Appendix F to RG 1.208, Page F-2(5)Because of the high variability in time domain characteristics of recorded earthquakes of similarmagnitudes and at similar distances, strict time domain criteria are not recommended.  However, modified motions defined as described above should typically have durations (defined by the 5 percent to 75 percent Arias intensity), and ratios V/A and AD/V2 (A, V, and D are peak groundacceleration, ground velocity, and ground displacement, respectively), which are generally consistent with characteristic values for the magnitude and distance of the appropriate controlling events defining the uniform hazard response spectra.  However, in some tectonic settings these criteria may need to be altered to accommodate phenomena, such as, directivity, basin effects, and hanging wall effects.(6)To be considered statistically independent, the directional correlation coefficients between pairsof time histories should not exceed a value of 0.161.  Simply shifting the starting time of a givenaccelerogram does not constitute the establishment of a different accelerogram.
events defining the uniform hazard response spectra.  However, in some tectonic settings these


}}
criteria may need to be altered to accommodate phenomena, such as, directivity, basin effects, and hanging wall effects.(6)To be considered statistically independent, the directional correlation coefficients between pairs of time histories should not exceed a value of 0.16
1.  Simply shifting the starting time of a given accelerogram does not constitute the establishment of a different accelerogram.}}


{{RG-Nav}}
{{RG-Nav}}

Revision as of 07:17, 31 August 2018

a Performance-Based Approach to Define the Site-Specific Earthquake Ground Motion (Formerly Draft Regulatory Guide DG-1146)
ML070310619
Person / Time
Issue date: 03/11/2007
From:
Office of Nuclear Regulatory Research
To:
Kammerer, A.M., RES/DFERR/ERA/MS, x7964
Shared Package
ML070260297 List:
References
DG-1146 RG-1.208
Download: ML070310619 (53)


The U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) issues regulatory guides to describe and make available to the public methods that the NRC staffconsiders acceptable for use in implementing specific parts of the agency's regulations, techniques that the staff uses in evaluating specific problems orpostulated accidents, and data that the staff need in reviewing applications for permits and licenses. Regulatory guides are n ot substitutes forregulations, and compliance with them is not required. Methods and solutions that differ from those set forth in regulatory guides will be deemedacceptable if they provide a basis for the findings required for the issuance or continuance of a permit or license by the Comm ission.This guide was issued after consideration of comments received from the public. The NRC staff encourages and welcomes comments and suggestionsin connection with improvements to published regulatory guides, as well as items for inclusion in regulatory guides that are currently being developed. The NRC staff will revise existing guides, as appropriate, to accommodate comments and to reflect new information or experience. Written commentsmay be submitted to the Rules and Directives Branch, Office of Administration, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC 20555-0001.Regulatory guides are issued in 10 broad divisions: 1, Power Reactors; 2, Research and Test Reactors; 3, Fuels and Materials Facilities; 4,Environmental and Siting; 5, Materials and Plant Protection; 6, Products; 7, Transportation; 8, Occupational Health; 9, Antitrust and Financial Review;and 10, General.Requests for single copies of draft or active regulatory guides (which may be reproduced) should be made to the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission,Washington, DC 20555, Attention: Reproduction and Distribution Services Section, or by fax to (301) 415-2289; or by email to Distribution@nrc.gov. Electronic copies of this guide and other recently issued guides are available thr ough the NRC's public Web site under the Regulatory Guides documentcollection of the NRC's El ectronic Reading Room at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/doc-collections/

and through the NRC's Agencywide DocumentsAccess and Management System (ADAMS) at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/adams.html, under Accession No. ML070310619.U.S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSIONMarch 2007 REGULATORY GUIDEOFFICE OF NUCLEAR REGULATORY RESEARCHREGULATORY GUIDE 1.208(Draft was issued as DG-1146, dated October 2006)A PERFORMANCE-BASED APPROACH TO DEFINETHE SITE-SPECIFIC EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION

A. INTRODUCTION

This regulatory guide provides an alternative for use in satisfying the requirements set forth in Section 100.23,"Geologic and Seismic Siting Criteria," of Title 10, Part 100, of the Code of Federal Regulations (10 CFR Part 100), "Reactor Site Criteria" (Ref. 1). The NRC staff incorporated developments in ground motion estimation models; updated models for earthquake sources; methods for

determining site response; and new methods for defining a site-specific, performance-based earthquake

ground motion that satisfy the requirements of 10 CFR 100.23 and lead to the establishment of the safe

shutdown earthquake ground motion (SSE). The purpose of this regulatory guide is to provide guidance

on the development of the site-specific ground motion response spectrum (GMRS). The GMRS

represents the first part of the development of the SSE for a site as a characterization of the regional and

local seismic hazard. The final SSE must satisfy both 10 CFR 100.23 and Appendix S, "Earthquake

Engineering Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants," to 10 CFR Part 50, "Domestic Licensing of Production

and Utilization Facilities" (Ref. 2).

In 10 CFR 100.23, paragraph (c), "Geological, Seismological, and Engineering Characteristics,"

and paragraph (d), "Geologic and Seismic Siting Factors," require that the geological, seismological, and

engineering characteristics of a site and its environs be investigated in sufficient scope and detail to

permit an adequate evaluation of the proposed site, provide sufficient information to support evaluations

performed to arrive at estimates of the SSE, and permit adequate engineering solutions to actual or

potential geologic and seismic effects at the proposed site. Data on the vibratory ground motion; tectonic

and non-tectonic surface deformation; earthquake recurrence rates, fault geometry and slip rates, site

foundation material; seismically induced floods and water waves; and other siting factors and design

conditions should be obtained by reviewing pertinent literature and carrying out field investigations.

RG 1.208, Page 2

10 CFR 100.23, paragraph (d)(1), "Determination of the Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion," requires that uncertainty inherent in estimates of the SSE be addressed through an appropriate

analysis, such as a probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA).

In Appendix A, "General Design Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants," to 10 CFR Part 50, General Design Criterion (GDC) 2, "Design Bases for Protection Against Natural Phenomena," requires, in part, that nuclear power plant structures, systems, and components (SSCs) important to safety must be

designed to withstand the effects of natural phenomena (such as earthquakes) without loss of capability

to perform their safety functions. Such SSCs must also be designed to accommodate the effects of, and

be compatible with, the environmental conditions associated with normal operation and postulated

accidents.

Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50 specifies, in part, requirements for implementing GDC 2 with respect to earthquakes. Paragraph IV(a)(1)(i), of Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50, requires that the SSE

must be characterized by free-field ground motion response spectra at the free ground surfac

e. In view of

the limited data available on vibratory ground motions of strong earthquakes, it will usually be

appropriate that the design response spectra be smoothed spectra compatible with site characteristics. In

addition, the horizontal motions in the free field at the foundation level of the structures consistent with

the SSE must be an appropriate response spectrum with a peak ground acceleration of at least 0.1g.

The 10 CFR Part 50 licensing practice required applicants to acquire a construction permit (CP), and then apply for an operating license (OL) during construction. Alternatively, the requirements and

procedures applicable to the NRC's issuance of early site permits (ESPs) and combined licenses (COLs)

for nuclear power facilities are set forth in Subparts A and C of 10 CFR Part 52, "Licenses, Certifications, and Approvals for Nuclear Power Plants" (Ref. 3), respectively.

This regulatory guide has been developed to provide general guidance on methods acceptable to the NRC staff for (1) conducting geological, geophysical, seismological, and geotechnical investigations;

(2) identifying and characterizing seismic sources; (3) conducting a probabilistic seismic hazard

assessment (PSHA); (4) determining seismic wave transmission (soil amplification) characteristics of soil

and rock sites; and (5) determining a site-specific, performance-based GMRS, satisfying the requirements

of paragraphs (c), (d)(1), and (d)(2) of 10 CFR 100.23, and leading to the establishment of an SSE to

satisfy the design requirements of Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50. The steps necessary to develop the

final SSE are described in Chapter 3, "Design of Structures, Components, Equipment and Systems," of

NUREG-0800, "Standard Review Plan for the Review of Safety Analysis Reports for Nuclear Power

Plants" (Ref. 4). Regulatory Position 5.4 of this guide provides a more detailed description of the

development of the final SSE.

This regulatory guide contains several appendices that address the objectives stated above.

Appendix A contains a list of definitions. Appendix B contains a list of abbreviations and acronyms.

Appendix C discusses a procedure to characterize site geology, seismology, and geophysic

s. Appendix D

describes the procedure to determine the controlling earthquakes. Appendix E describes the procedure

for determining seismic wave transmission (soil amplification) characteristics of soil and rock sites.

Appendix F provides criteria for developing and evaluating modified ground motions used for soil

response analyses.

This regulatory guide may address information collections that are covered by the requirements of 10 CFR Part 50, 10 CFR Part 52, and 10 CFR Part 100, which the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) approved under OMB control numbers 3150-0011, 3150-0151, and 3150-0093, respectivel

y. The

NRC may neither conduct nor sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, an information

collection request or requirement unless the requesting document displays a currently valid OMB control

number.

1The CEUS and WUS Time History databases are provided in NUREG/CR-6728 (Ref. 6).RG 1.208, Page 3

B. DISCUSSION

Background Regulatory Guide 1.165 (Ref. 5) provides general guidance on procedures acceptable to the NRC

staff to satisfy the requirements of 10 CFR 100.23. This regulatory guide provides alternative guidance

that incorporates developments in ground motion estimation models; updated models for earthquake

sources; methods for determining site response; and new methods for defining a site-specific, performance-based GMRS. Therefore, the NRC staff is providing this regulatory guide as an alternative

to Regulatory Guide 1.165 (Ref. 5) to satisfy, in part, the requirements of 10 CFR 100.23 and Appendix

S to 10 CFR Part 50.

The general process to determine a site-specific, performance-based GMRS includes the following:(1)site- and region-specific geological, seismological, geophysical, and geotechnical investigations(2)a probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA)

(3)a site response analysis to incorporate the effects of local geology and topography

(4)the selection of appropriate performance goals and methodology Geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations are performed to develop an up-to- date, site-specific, earth science database that supports site characterization and a PSHA. The results of

these investigations will also be used to assess whether new data and their interpretation are consistent

with the information used in probabilistic seismic hazard studies previously accepted by the NRC.

The PSHA is conducted with up-to-date interpretations of earthquake sources, earthquake recurrence, and strong ground motion estimation. The site seismic hazard characteristics are quantified

by the seismic hazard curves from a PSHA and the uniform hazard response spectra (UHRS) that cover a

broad range of natural frequencies. The hazard curves are developed in part by identifying and

characterizing each seismic source in terms of maximum magnitude, magnitude recurrence relationship, and source geometry. The rock-based ground motion at a site resulting from the combined effect of all

sources can then be determined through the use of attenuation relationships.

Seismic wave transmission (site amplification) procedures are necessary to obtain appropriate UHRS at the free-field ground surface if the shear wave velocity of the surficial material is less than the

generic rock conditions appropriate for the rock-based attenuation relationships used in the PSHA. A

database of earthquake time histories on rock for both the central and eastern United States (CEUS) and

the western United States (WUS) has been developed to determine the dynamic site response for the soil

or rock site conditions.

1

2The reference probability is computed as the median probability obtained from the distribution of median probabilitiesof exceeding the SSE at 29 sites in the CEUS. The sites selected were intended to represent relatively recent (to the study) designs that used the Regulatory Guide 1.60 (Ref. 8), design response spectrum, or similar spectrum, as their design bases. The use of the reference probability ensures an adequate level of conservatism in determining the SSEconsistent with recent licensing decisions.

3The P F , R P, and H D criteria corresponding to Seismic Design Category (SDC) 5 in Reference 7 (which are equivalent tonuclear power plant requirements) are used.RG 1.208, Page 4 A performance-based approach is described in Chapters 1 and 2 of ASCE/SEI Standard 43-05 (Ref. 7), instead of the reference probability approach described in Appendix B to Regulatory Guide

1.165 (Ref. 5).

2 The performance-based approach employs Target Performance Goal (P

F), Probability Ratio (R P), and Hazard Exceedance Probability (H

D) criteria

3 to ensure that nuclear power plants can withstand the effects of earthquakes with a desired performance, the desired performance being

expressed as the target value of 1 E-05 for the mean annual probability of exceedance (frequency) of the

onset of significant inelastic deformation (FOSID). This approach targets a performance criteria for

SSCs which is defined relative to the onset of inelastic deformation; instead of relative to the occurrence

of failure of the SSC. The mean annual probability of exceedance associated with this performance

target was chosen based on this performance criterion.

One of the objectives in developing the performance-based GMRS is to achieve approximately consistent performance for SSCs, across a range of seismic environments, annual probabilities, and

structural frequencies. The intent is to develop a site-specific GMRS that achieves the P

F that ensures that the performance of the SSCs related to safety and radiological protection is acceptable.

Basis for Regulatory Positions Site- and Region-Specific Investigations to Characterize Site Geology, Seismology, and Geophysics The primary objective of geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations is to develop an up-to-date, site-specific earth science database that supports site characterization and a PSHA. The

results of these investigations will also be used to assess whether new data and their interpretation are

consistent with the most recent information used in probabilistic seismic hazard studies accepted by the

NRC. If the new data, such as new seismic sources and new ground motion attenuation relationships, are

consistent with the existing earth science database, updating or modification of information used in the

hazard analysis is not required. It will be necessary to update seismic sources and ground motion

attenuation relationships for sites where there is significant new information resulting from the site

investigations.

Features Discovered During Construction It should be demonstrated that deformation features discovered during construction (particularly faults, potential soft zones, or other features of engineering significance) do not have the potential to

compromise the safety of the plant. Applying the combined licensing procedure to a site could result in

issuing a license prior to the start of construction. During the construction of nuclear power plants

licensed in the past, previously unknown faults were often discovered in site excavation

s. Before

issuance of the OL, it was necessary to demonstrate that faults exposed in the excavation posed no hazard

to the facility. Under the combined license procedure, these kinds of features should be mapped and

assessed as to their rupture and ground motion generating potential while the excavations' walls and

bases are exposed, and the NRC staff should be notified when excavations are open for inspection.

RG 1.208, Page 5 Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis Methods A PSHA has been identified in 10 CFR 100.23 as a means to address the uncertainties in the determination of the SSE. Furthermore, the rule recognizes that the nature of uncertainty and the

appropriate approach to account for uncertainties depend on the tectonic setting of the site and on

properly characterizing input parameters to the PSHA, such as the seismic source characteristics, the

recurrence of earthquakes within a seismic source, the maximum magnitude of earthquakes within a

seismic source, and engineering estimation of earthquake ground motion through attenuation

relationships.

Every site is unique; therefore, requirements for analyses and investigations vary. It is not possible to provide procedures for addressing all situations. In cases that are not specifically addressed

in this regulatory guide, prudent and sound engineering judgment should be exercised.

Probabilistic procedures were developed specifically for nuclear power plant seismic hazard assessments in the CEUS, also referred to as the Stable Continent Region (SCR). Experience has been

gained by applying this methodology at nuclear facility sites, both reactor and non-reactor sites, throughout the United States. The experience with these applications also served as the basis for the

guidelines for conducting a PSHA in Reference 9. The guidelines detailed in Reference 9 should be

incorporated into the PSHA process to the extent possible. These procedures provide a structured

approach for decision making with respect to site-specific investigations. A PSHA provides a framework

to address the uncertainties associated with the identification and characterization of seismic sources by

incorporating multiple interpretations of seismological parameters. A PSHA also provides a means for

evaluation of the likelihood of SSE occurrence during the design lifetime of a given facility, given the

recurrence interval and recurrence pattern of earthquakes in pertinent seismic source

s. Within the

framework of a probabilistic analysis, uncertainties in the characterization of seismic sources and ground

motions are identified and incorporated in the procedure at each step of the process for estimating the

GMRS. The role of geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations is to develop geoscience

information about the site for use in the detailed design analysis of the facility, as well as to ensure that

the seismic hazard analysis is based on up-to-date information.

Experience in performing seismic hazard evaluations in active plate-margin regions in the WUS (for example, the San Gregorio-Hosgri fault zone and the Cascadia Subduction Zone) has also identified

uncertainties associated with the characterization of seismic sources (Refs. 10-12). Sources of

uncertainty include fault geometry, rupture segmentation, rupture extent, seismic-activity rate, ground

motion, and earthquake occurrence modeling. As is the case for sites in the CEUS, alternative

hypotheses and parameters must be considered to account for these uncertainties.

Uncertainties associated with the identification and characterization of seismic sources in tectonic environments in both the CEUS and the WUS should be evaluated. While the most recent

characterization of any seismic source accepted by the NRC staff can be used as a starting point for

analysis of a new facility, any new information related to a seismic source that impacts the hazard

calculations must be evaluated and incorporated into the PSHA as appropriate based on the technical

information available.

RG 1.208, Page 6 Central and Eastern United States The CEUS is considered to be that part of the United States east of the Rocky Mountain front, or east of Longitude 105 West (Refs. 13, 14). A PSHA in the CEUS must account for credible alternative seismic source models through the use of a decision tree with appropriate weighting factors that are

based on the most up-to-date information and relative confidence in alternative characterizations for each

seismic source. Seismic sources identified and characterized by the Lawrence Livermore National

Laboratory (LLNL) (Refs. 13-15) and the Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) (Refs. 16, 17) were

used for studies in the CEUS in the past. In addition to the LLNL and EPRI resources, the United States

Geological Survey also maintains a large database of seismic sources for both the CEUS and the WUS.

The characterization of specific seismic sources found in these databases may still represent the latest

information available at the time that a PSHA is to be undertaken. However, if more up-to-date

information is available, it should be incorporated.

In the CEUS, characterization of seismic sources is more problematic than in active plate-margin regions because there is generally no clear association between seismicity and known tectonic structures

or near-surface geology. In general, the observed geologic structures are a result of response to tectonic

forces that may have little or no correlation with current tectonic forces. Therefore, it is important to

account for this uncertainty by the use of multiple alternative source models.

The identification of seismic sources and reasonable alternatives in the CEUS considers hypotheses currently advocated for the occurrence of earthquakes in the CEUS (e.g., the reactivation of

favorably oriented zones of weakness or the local amplification and release of stresses concentrated

around a geologic structure). In tectonically active areas of the CEUS, such as the New Madrid Seismic

Zone, where geological, seismological, and geophysical evidence suggest the nature of the sources that

generate the earthquakes, it may be more appropriate to characterize those seismic sources by using

procedures similar to those normally applied in the WUS.

Western United States The WUS is considered to be that part of the United States that lies west of the Rocky Mountain front, or west of approximately 105 West Longitude. In some regions of the WUS, significant research into seismic sources is ongoing and the results of this research should be evaluated and addressed.

The active plate-margin regions include, for example, coastal California, Oregon, Washington, and Alaska. For the active plate-margin regions, where earthquakes can often be correlated with known

faults that have experienced repeated movements at or near the ground surface during the Quaternary, tectonic structures should be assessed for their earthquake and surface deformation potentia

l. In these

regions, at least three types of sources may exist:(1)faults that are known to be at or near the surface(2)buried (blind) sources that may often be manifested as folds at the earth's surface

(3)subduction zone sources, such as those in the Pacific Northwest and Alaska The nature of surface faults can be evaluated by conventional surface and near-surface investigation techniques to assess orientation, geometry, sense of displacements, length of rupture, Quaternary history, etc. Possibilities of multiple ruptures should be considered, as appropriate.

Buried (blind) faults are often associated with surficial deformation such as folding, uplift, or subsidence. The surface expression of blind faulting can be detected by mapping the uplifted or down-

dropped geomorphological features or stratigraphy, survey leveling, and geodetic method

s. The nature of

the structure at depth can often be evaluated by deep core borings and geophysical techniques.

RG 1.208, Page 7 Continental U.S. subduction zones are located in the Pacific Northwest and Alaska. Seismic sources associated with subduction zones are sources within the overriding plate, on the interface

between the subducting and overriding lithospheric plates, and in the interior of the downgoing oceanic

slab. The characterization of subduction zone seismic sources should consider the three-dimensional

geometry of the subducting plate, rupture segmentation of subduction zones, geometry of historical

ruptures, constraints on the up-dip and down-dip extent of rupture, and comparisons with other

subducting plates worldwide.

The Basin and Range region of the WUS, and to a lesser extent the Pacific Northwest and the central United States, exhibit temporal clustering of earthquakes. Temporal clustering is best

exemplified by the rupture histories within the Wasatch fault zone in Utah, where several large, late

Holocene coseismic faulting events occurred at relatively close intervals (for hundreds to thousands of

years) that were preceded by long periods of quiescence that lasted thousands to tens of thousands of

years. Temporal clustering should be considered in these regions, or wherever paleoseismic evidence

indicates that it has occurred.

Ground motion attenuation relationships for the WUS are also continually being developed and revised. Significant effort has been undertaken by the Pacific Earthquake Engineering Research Center's

Lifelines program to develop Next Generation Attenuation (NGA) relationships for shallow crustal

earthquakes in active tectonic regions based on the large database of earthquake recordings now available

for this tectonic setting. The suitability of the NGA relationships or other WUS relationships for a

particular site will be evaluated on a case-by-case basis.

Lower-Bound Magnitude Cutoff Current seismic hazard analysis methods generally utilize a lower-bound body wave magnitude cut-off value for earthquakes to be included in the PSHA. This lower-bound magnitude cut-off level is a

conservatively defined value based on research studies whose objective was to estimate the damage

potential of smaller earthquakes. Reference 18 establishes an appropriate distribution of low-magnitude

earthquakes in the seismic hazard analysis through the use of the cumulative absolute velocity (CAV)

model, in place of a lower-bound magnitude cutoff.

Several ground motion measures such as peak ground acceleration, Arias intensity, root mean square acceleration, and CAV were evaluated to determine the single ground motion measure that is best

correlated with the threshold of potential damage. The CAV was determined to be the best parameter

correlating damage with the Modified Mercalli Intensity Scale, and a CAV value of 0.16 g-sec was found

to be a conservative characterization of the threshold between damaging and non-damaging earthquake

motions for buildings of good design and construction. An empirical model for estimating CAV in terms

of magnitude, peak ground acceleration (PGA), and duration is needed because the PSHA calculation

does not use time histories directly.

Spectral Frequency Range Considered in the Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analyses The frequency range considered in the PSHA should extend from a low frequency that can be reliably obtained from the current strong-motion data set from the WUS, principally California, to a high-

frequency limit that permits the ratio of spectral acceleration to PGA to reach nearly 1 for hard rock site

conditions. For the CEUS this high-frequency limit is approximately 100 Hz. For soft rock conditions, the ratio of spectral acceleration to PGA will reach 1 at about 40-50 Hz. To obtain a smooth plot of

spectral response across the frequency range of interest, the hazard assessment should be provided for a

minimum of 30 frequencies, approximately equally spaced on a logarithmic frequency axis between 100

and 0.1 Hz.

RG 1.208, Page 8 Deaggregation of Mean Hazard Deaggregation provides information useful for review of the PSHA and insight into the seismic sources that most impact the hazard at a particular site. It can also be used to determine the controlling

earthquakes (i.e., magnitudes and distances) which can be used to perform dynamic site response

analyses.Analysis of multiple ground motion levels are used to obtain a more complete understanding of the earthquake characteristics (i.e., mean magnitudes and distances) that contribute to the high-frequency

(5 and 10 Hz) and low-frequency (1 and 2.5 Hz) hazard, than could be obtained from a single ground

motion level (e.g., 1 E-05/yr).

Choice of Epsilon in Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analyses Epsilon, the number of standard deviations included in defining the distribution of ground motions for each magnitude and distance scenario, can have a significant impact on the results of the

PSHA. Care should be taken in choosing a value for epsilon large enough such that natural aleatory

variability in ground motions is adequately addressed. A study conducted by EPRI and the U.S.

Department of Energy (DOE) (Ref. 19) found no technical basis for truncating the ground motion

distribution at a specified number of standard deviations (epsilons) below that implied by the strength of

the geologic materials. Even though very large ground motions may have a low probability of

occurrence, when the hazard is calculated for low annual frequencies of exceedance, low probability

events need to be considered.

Site Response Analysis For rock or soil sites where the free-field ground surface shear wave velocity is less than the generic rock conditions defined by the attenuation relationships used in the PSHA, seismic wave

transmission (site amplification) procedures should be used to obtain appropriate UHRS at the free-field

ground surface. Earthquake time histories and time-domain procedures are one method that may be used

to determine the dynamic site response for the soil or rock site conditions. When using this method, enough earthquake time history records should be used to get consistent mean results. Reference 6

contains a database of recorded time histories on rock for both the CEUS and WUS that can be used as

seed records for input time histories for analyses. The records provided in Reference 6 should be used

consistently with the recommendations for use in Reference 6 (e.g., the records were developed to be

used as seed motions for spectral matching programs, rather than to be used directly). The database is

divided into magnitude and distance bins, with each bin having a minimum of 15, three-component (two

horizontal and one vertical) sets.

RG 1.208, Page 9 Performance-Based Method A performance-based approach is described in Chapters 1 and 2 of ASCE/SEI Standard 43-05 (Standard) (Ref. 7). The Standard was developed to provide performance-based criteria for the seismic

design of safety-related SSCs for use in nuclear facilities, covering a broad range of facilities that

process, store, or handle radioactive materials. The goal of the Standard is to present seismic design

criteria using a graded approach commensurate with the relative importance to safety and safeguards, which will ensure that nuclear facilities can withstand the effects of earthquakes with desired

performance. The performance-based approach used for this regulatory guide is based on the premise

that the seismic demand and structural capacity evaluation criteria laid out by the NRC's Standard

Review Plan (SRP) (NUREG-0800) ensure sufficient conservatism to reasonably achieve both of the

following:(1)less than about a 1% probability of unacceptable performance for the site-specific response spectrum ground motion(2)less than about a 10% probability of unacceptable performance for a ground motion equal to

150% of the site-specific response spectrum ground motion The Standard, for the most demanding seismic design category (SDC 5), recommends using a P

F= 1 E-05 for the FOSID, R

P = 10, and H

D = 1 E-04 for the minimum structural damage state, which is described as essentially elastic behavior. Specifically, essentially elastic behavior means that localized

inelasticity might occur at stress concentration points, but the overall seismic response will be essentially

elastic.The performance-based approach combines a conservative characterization of ground motion hazard with equipment/structure performance (fragility characteristics) to establish risk-consistent

GMRS, rather than only hazard-consistent ground shaking, as occurs using the hazard reference

probability approach in Appendix B to Regulatory Guide 1.165 (Ref. 5). The performance target (the

mean annual probability of SSCs reaching the limit state of inelastic response) results from the

modification of the UHRS at the free-field ground surface by a design factor to obtain the performance-

based site-specific GMRS. The design factor achieves a relatively consistent annual probability of plant

component failure across the range of plant locations and structural frequencie

s. It does this by

accounting for the slope of the seismic hazard curve, which changes with structural frequency and site

location. The design factor ensures that the site-specific response spectrum is equal to or greater than the

mean 1 E-04 UHRS.

The flow chart in Figure 1 depicts the procedures described in this regulatory guide.

RG 1.208, Page 10

Geological, Geophysical, Seismological, and Geotechnical InvestigationsRegulatory Position 1Appendix C

Seismic Sources Significant to the Site Seismic HazardRegulatory Position 2Appendix C

Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis (PSHA) Procedures Regulatory Position 3 Deaggregation of Mean HazardRegulatory Position 3.5Appendix D

Seismic Wave Transmission (Soil Amplification) Characteristics of the SiteRegulatory Position 4Appendices E & F

Performance-Based Site-Specific Earthquake Ground Motion Procedure Regulatory Position 5 Figure 1. Flow Diagram RG 1.208, Page 11

C. REGULATORY POSITION

1.Geological, Geophysical, Seismological, and Geotechnical Investigations1.1Comprehensive Site Area and Region Investigations Comprehensive geological, seismological, geophysical, and geotechnical engineering investigations of the site area and region should be performed. For existing nuclear power plant sites

where additional units are planned, the geosciences technical information originally used to validate

those sites may need to be updated. Depending on (1) how much new or additional information has

become available since the initial investigations and analyses were performed, and (2) the complexity of

the site and regional geology and seismology, additional data may be require

d. This technical

information should be used, along with all other available information, to plan and determine the scope

of additional investigations. The investigations described in this regulatory guide are performed

primarily to gather information needed to confirm the suitability of the site and to gather data pertinent to

the safe design and construction of the nuclear power plant. Appropriate geological, seismological, and

geophysical investigations are described in Appendix C to this regulatory guid

e. Geotechnical

investigations are described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. 20). Another important purpose for the site-

specific investigations is to determine whether there are any new data or interpretations that are not

adequately incorporated into the existing PSHA databases. Appendix C also describes a method for

assessing the impact of new information, obtained during the site-specific investigations on the databases

used for the PSHA.

These investigations should be performed at four levels, with the degree of detail based on (1)

distance from the site, (2) the nature of the Quaternary tectonic regime, (3) the geological complexity of

the site and region, (4) the existence of potential seismic sources, and (5) the potential for surface

deformations, etc. A more detailed discussion of the areas and levels of investigations and the bases for

them are presented in Appendix C to this regulatory guide. General guidelines for the levels of

investigation are characterized as follows.

1.1.1 Within a Radius of 320 Kilometers (200 mi) of the Site (Site Region)

Conduct regional geological and seismological investigations to identify seismic sources. These investigations should include literature reviews, the study of maps and remote sensing data and, if

necessary, onsite ground-truth reconnaissance.

1.1.2 Within a Radius of 40 Kilometers (25 mi) of the Site (Site Vicinity)

Geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations should be carried out in greater detail than the regional investigations, to identify and characterize the seismic and surface deformation

potential of any capable tectonic sources and the seismic potential of seismogenic sources, or to

demonstrate that such structures are not present. Sites with capable tectonic sources within a radius of 40

kilometers (km) (25 mi) may require more extensive geological and seismological investigations and

analyses [similar in detail to investigations and analysis usually preferred within an 8 km (5 mi) radius].

1.1.3 Within a Radius of 8 Kilometers (5 mi) of the Site (Site Area)

Detailed geological, seismological, geophysical, and geotechnical engineering investigations should be conducted to evaluate the potential for tectonic deformation at or near the ground surface and

to assess the transmission characteristics of soils and rocks in the site vicinity.

RG 1.208, Page 12

1.1.4 Within a Radius of Approximately 1 Kilometer (0.6 mi) of the Site (Site Location)

Very detailed geological, geophysical, and geotechnical engineering investigations should be conducted to assess specific soil and rock characteristics, as described in Reference 20.1.2Expanding the Areas of Investigation The areas of investigation may need to be expanded beyond those specified above in regions that include capable tectonic sources, relatively high seismicity, or complex geology, or in regions that have

experienced a large, geologically recent earthquake identified in historical records or by paleoseismic

data.1.3Features Discovered During Construction It should be demonstrated that deformation features discovered during construction (particularly faults, potential soft zones, or other features of engineering significance) do not have the potential to

compromise the safety of the plant. The newly identified features should be mapped and assessed as to

their rupture and ground motion generating potential while the excavations' walls and bases are exposed.

A commitment should be made, in documents (safety analysis reports) supporting the license application, to geologically map all excavations of significant size and to notify the NRC staff when excavations are

open for inspection. This should apply to excavations for construction of all Seismic Category I

structures, as a minimum.1.4Justifying Assumptions and Conclusions Data sufficient to clearly justify all assumptions and conclusions should be presented. Because engineering solutions cannot always be satisfactorily demonstrated for the effects of permanent ground

displacement, it is prudent to avoid a site that has a potential for surface or near-surface deformation.

Such sites normally will require extensive additional investigations.1.5Characterize Lithologic, Stratigraphic, Hydrologic, and Structural Geologic Conditions For the site and for the area surrounding the site, the lithologic, stratigraphic, hydrologic, and structural geologic conditions should be characterized. The investigations should include the

measurement of the static and dynamic engineering properties of the materials underlying the site as well

as an evaluation of the physical evidence concerning the behavior during prior earthquakes of the

surficial materials and the substrata underlying the site. The properties needed to assess the behavior of

the underlying material during earthquakes should be measured. These include the potential for

liquefaction and the characteristics of the underlying material in transmitting earthquake ground motions

to the foundations of the plant (such as seismic wave velocities, density, water content, porosity, elastic

moduli, and strength).

RG 1.208, Page 132.Seismic Sources Significant to the Site Seismic Hazard2.1Evaluation of New Seismic Sources For sites in the CEUS, existing databases may be used to identify seismic sources to perform PSHA. Previously unidentified seismic sources that were not included in these databases should be

appropriately characterized and sensitivity analyses performed to assess their significance to the seismic

hazard estimate. The results of investigation discussed in Regulatory Position 1 should be used, in

accordance with Appendix C to this regulatory guide, to determine whether the seismic sources and their

characterization should be updated. The guidance in Regulatory Positions 2.2 and 2.3 (below) and the

methods in Appendix C to this regulatory guide may be used if additional seismic sources are to be

developed as a result of investigations.2.2Use of Alternative Seismic Sources When existing methods and databases are not used or are not applicable, the guidance in Regulatory Position 2.3 should be used for identification and characterization of seismic source

s. The

uncertainties in the characterization of seismic sources should be addressed. "Seismic sources" is a

general term that is equivalent to capable tectonic sources.

Identification and characterization of seismic sources should be based on regional and site geological and geophysical data, historical and instrumental seismicity data, the regional stress field, and

geological evidence of prehistoric earthquakes. Investigations to identify seismic sources are described

in Appendix C to this regulatory guide. The bases for the identification of seismic sources should be

described. A general list of characteristics to be evaluated for seismic sources is presented in Appendix

C.2.3Characterizing Seismic Potential As part of the seismic source characterization, the seismic potential for each source should be evaluated. Typically, characterization of the seismic potential consists of four equally important

elements:(1)selection of a model for the spatial distribution of earthquakes in a source

(2)selection of a model for the temporal distribution of earthquakes in a source

(3)selection of a model for the relative frequency of earthquakes of various magnitudes, including an estimate for the largest earthquake that could occur in the source under the current tectonic

regime(4)a complete description of the uncertainty For example, truncated exponential and characteristic earthquake models are often used for the distribution of magnitudes. A stationary Poisson process is used to model the spatial and temporal

occurrences of earthquakes in a source. For a general discussion of evaluating the earthquake potential

and characterizing the uncertainty, refer to NUREG/CR-6372 (Ref. 9).

RG 1.208, Page 14

2.3.1 Characterizing Seismic Potential When Alternative Methods and Databases Are Used For sites in the CEUS, the seismic sources and data accepted by the NRC in past licensing decisions may be used as a starting point, along with the data gathered from the investigations carried out

as described in Regulatory Position 1.

Generally, the seismic sources for the CEUS are broad areal source zones because there is uncertainty about the underlying causes of earthquakes. This uncertainty is caused by a lack of active

surface faulting, a low rate of seismic activity, or a short historical record. The assessment of earthquake

recurrence for CEUS area sources commonly relies heavily on catalogs of historic earthquake

s. Because

these catalogs are incomplete and cover a relatively short period of time, the earthquake recurrence rate

may not be estimated reliably. Considerable care must be taken to correct for incompleteness and to

model the uncertainty in the rate of earthquake recurrence. To completely characterize the seismic

potential for a source, it is also necessary to estimate the largest earthquake magnitude that a seismic

source is capable of generating under the current tectonic regime. This estimated magnitude defines the

upper bound of the earthquake recurrence relationship.

Primary methods for assessing maximum earthquakes for area sources usually include a consideration of the historical seismicity record, the pattern and rate of seismic activity, the Quaternary

geologic record (1.8 million years and younger), characteristics of the source, the current stress regime (and how it aligns with known tectonic structures), paleoseismic data, and analogs to sources in other

regions considered tectonically similar to the CEUS. Because of the shortness of the historical catalog

and low rate of seismic activity, considerable judgment is needed. It is important to characterize the

large uncertainties in the assessment of the earthquake potential (Refs. 9 and 16).

2.3.2 Characterizing Seismic Potential for Western United States Sites For sites located within the WUS, earthquakes can often be associated with known tectonic structures with a high degree of certainty. For faults, the earthquake potential is related to the

characteristics of the estimated future rupture, such as the total rupture area, the length, or the amount of

fault displacement. Empirical relations can be used to estimate the earthquake potential from fault

behavior data and also to estimate the amount of displacement that might be expected for a given

magnitude. It is prudent to use several different rupture length or area-versus-magnitude relations to

obtain an estimate of the earthquake magnitude. When such correlations are used, the earthquake

potential is often evaluated as the mean of the distribution. The difficult issue is the evaluation of the

appropriate rupture dimension to be used. This is a judgmental process based on geological data for the

fault in question and the behavior of other regional fault systems of the same type.

In addition to maximum magnitude, other elements of the recurrence model are generally obtained using catalogs of seismicity, fault slip rate, and other data. Known sources of uncertainty

should be appropriately modeled.

2.3.3 Characterizing Seismic Potential for Sites Near Subduction Zones For sites near subduction zones, such as in the Pacific Northwest and Alaska, the maximum magnitude must be assessed for subduction zone seismic sources. Worldwide observations indicate that

the largest known earthquakes are associated with the plate boundary interface, although intraslab

earthquakes may also have large magnitudes. The assessment of plate interface earthquakes can be based

on estimates of the expected dimensions of rupture or analogies to other subduction zones worldwide.

RG 1.208, Page 153.Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis Procedures A PSHA should be performed to allow for the use of multiple source models to estimate the likelihood of earthquake ground motions occurring at a site and to systematically take into account

uncertainties that exist in various parameters (such as seismic sources, maximum earthquakes, and

ground motion attenuation). Alternative hypotheses are considered in a quantitative fashion in a PSHA.

They can be used to evaluate the sensitivity of the hazard to the uncertainties in the significant

parameters and to identify the relative contribution of each seismic source to the hazard.

The following steps describe a procedure acceptable to the NRC staff for performing a PSHA.3.1Perform Regional and Site Investigations Perform regional and site geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations in accordance with Regulatory Position 1 and Appendix C to this regulatory guide.3.2Evaluation of New Information For CEUS sites, perform an evaluation of seismic sources, in accordance with Appendix C to this regulatory guide, to determine whether they are consistent with the site-specific data gathered in

Regulatory Position 3.1 or if they require updating. The PSHA should be updated if the new information

indicates that the current version of the seismic source model underestimates the hazard or if new

attenuation relationships are available. In most cases, limited-scope sensitivity studies are sufficient to

demonstrate that the existing database in the PSHA envelops the findings from site-specific

investigations. Any significant update should follow the guidance of NUREG/CR-6372 (Ref. 9).3.3Conduct a Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis Perform a site-specific PSHA with up-to-date interpretations of earthquake sources, earthquake recurrence, and strong ground motion estimation using original or updated sources as determined in

Regulatory Positions 3.1 and 3.2. CAV filtering can be used in place of a lower-bound magnitude cutoff

of 5.0 (Ref. 18). For the CEUS, the understanding of single- and double-corner ground-motion models is

evolving, and the PSHA should fully document the appropriateness of using either or both of these

models. Characterize epistemic uncertainties in a complete and defensible fashio

n. Aleatory variability

of the ground motion as expressed in the choice of standard deviation of natural log of ground motion

used in the PSHA should be considered carefully and described. The ground motion estimates should be

made in the free field to develop the seismic hazard information base discussed in Appendix D to this

regulatory guide.3.4Hazard Assessment Report fractile hazard curves at the following fractile levels (p) for each ground motion parameter: 0.05, 0.16, 0.50, 0.84, and 0.95, as well as the mean. Report the fractile hazard curves in

tabular as well as graphical format. Also, determine the mean UHRS for annual exceedance frequencies

of 1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06 at a minimum of 30 structural frequencies approximately equally spaced on

a logarithmic frequency axis between 100 and 0.1 Hz.

RG 1.208, Page 163.5Deaggregate the Mean Probabilistic Hazard Characterization Deaggregate the mean probabilistic hazard characterization at ground motion levels corresponding to the annual frequencies of 1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06 in accordance with Appendix D to

this regulatory guide. Deaggregation provides information useful for review of the PSHA and insight

into the seismic sources that most impact the hazard at a particular site. It can also be used to determine

the controlling earthquakes (i.e., magnitudes and distances) and document the hazard information base as

discussed in Appendix D.4.Seismic Wave Transmission Characteristics of the Site The hazard curves from the PSHA are defined for general surficial rock conditions that are consistent with the definition of rock for the attenuation relationships used in the PSHA. For example, existing attenuation relationships for the CEUS typically define generic rock conditions as materials with

a shear wave velocity (Vs) of 2.8 km/sec (9,200 ft/sec). Because the surficial and subsurface shear wave

velocities at nuclear power plant sites are generally less than those for the generic rock conditions, the

following procedures should be used to define the UHRS at the free-field ground surfac

e. Additional

discussion pertaining to this regulatory position is provided in Appendix E to this regulatory guide.

For both soil and rock sites, the subsurface model should extend to sufficient depth to reach the generic rock conditions as defined in the attenuation relationships used in the PSHA.4.1Site and Laboratory Investigations and Testing Perform site and laboratory investigations and testing to obtain data defining the static and dynamic engineering properties of the site-specific soil and rock materials. Consideration should be

given to spatial distribution both within individual geologic strata and across the sit

e. Methods

acceptable to the NRC staff are described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. 20), Regulatory Guide 1.138 (Ref. 21), and Subsection C.2.2.2 of Appendix C to this regulatory guide. Sufficient site property data

should be developed to adequately estimate the mean and variability of the properties in the site response

calculations. When soil models are deduced from laboratory studies, the sampling and testing programs

should be critically peer reviewed to ensure that the generated soil dynamic nonlinear properties are

appropriate to properly characterize site response.4.2Dynamic Site Response Using the site-specific dynamic properties of the soil and information on hazard levels from the rock-based site-specific UHRS, the dynamic site response should be determined through analyses based

on either time history or random vibration theory (RVT). If a time history-based procedure is used, it is

necessary to determine an appropriate set of ground motions or earthquake time histories for each of the

target response spectra to be analyzed. A sufficient number of time histories should be used to obtain

consistent average behavior from the dynamic site response analyses. The target response spectra may be

based on Controlling Earthquakes, as discussed in Appendix E.

RVT methods characterize the input rock motion using a Fourier amplitude spectrum instead of time domain earthquake input motions. This spectrum is propagated through the soil to the surface using

frequency domain transfer functions and computing peak ground accelerations or spectral accelerations

using extreme value statistics. In the past, traditional site response analyses using time histories has been

most prevalent. However, RVT methods are acceptable as long as the strain dependent soil properties

are adequately accounted for in the analysis.

RG 1.208, Page 17 Reference 6 contains a database of recorded time histories on rock for both the CEUS and WUS

to be used as seed motions for site response analyses. The database is divided into magnitude and

distance bins, with each bin having a minimum of 15, three-component (two horizontal and one vertical)

sets. If these records are used as seed motions, they should be developed consistent with the

recommendations in Reference 6. Appendix F to this regulatory guide provides criteria acceptable to the

NRC staff for developing and evaluating sets of modified ground motions used for soil response and

structural analyses. The time histories are scaled or spectrally matched to match the response spectrum

and have characteristics appropriate for the corresponding target response spectrum.

Often vertically propagating shear waves are the dominant contributor to free-field ground motions at a site. In these cases, a one-dimensional equivalent-linear analysis or nonlinear analysis that

assumes vertical propagation of shear waves may be appropriate. However, site characteristics (such as a

dipping bedrock surface, topographic effects, or other impedance boundaries), regional characteristics (such as certain topographic effects), and source characteristics (such as nearby dipping seismic sources)

may require that analyses are also able to account for inclined waves.

A Monte Carlo or equivalent procedure should be used to accommodate the variability in soil depth, shear wave velocities, layer thicknesses, and strain-dependent dynamic nonlinear material

properties at the site. A sufficient number of convolution analyses should be performed using scaled

earthquake time histories to adequately capture the effect of the site subsurface variability and the

uncertainty in the soil properties. Generally, at least 60 convolution analyses should be performed to

define the mean and the standard deviation of the site response. The results of the site response analyses

are used to develop high- and low-frequency site amplification functions as detailed in Appendix E to

this regulatory guide.4.3Site Amplification Function Based on the site response analyses described in Regulatory Position 4.2, site amplification functions are calculated. To determine the UHRS at the free-field ground surface for a specific annual

probability of exceedance, multiply the rock-based UHRS by either the high-frequency or low-frequency

site amplification functions as appropriate for each frequency. The appropriate site amplification

function is determined for each frequency based on which of the controlling or input earthquakes has a

spectral value that is closest to the rock UHRS at that frequency. At high frequencies, this will be the

high-frequency spectral amplification function, and at low-frequencies, the low-frequency site

amplification function. By applying the appropriate (high- or low-frequency) amplification function for

each frequency to the mean rock-based UHRS, the site-specific soil-based UHRS is calculated for the

free ground surface. The surface 1 E-04 and 1 E-05 UHRS are site-specific earthquake ground motions

that form the basis of the performance-based site GMRS.

5.Performance-Based Site-Specific Earthquake Ground Motion Procedure5.1Horizontal Spectrum The performance-based, site-specific earthquake ground motion is developed using a method analogous to the development of the ASCE/SEI Standard 43-05 (Ref. 7) design response spectrum (DRS)

that achieves the annual FOSID target performance goal (P

F) of 1 E-05, and hazard exceedance probability (H

D) of 1 E-04, described in Chapters 1 and 2 of Reference 7, and also discussed in Section B

of this guide. The horizontal site-specific, performance-based GMRS are obtained by scaling the site-

specific mean UHRS by a design factor (DF), or RG 1.208, Page 18GMRS = UHRS x DFEquation (1)

where UHRS is the mean 1 E-04 UHRS derived in accordance with Regulatory Position 4.3, and DF (from Reference 7) is DF = max { 1.0, 0.6(A

R)0.8 }Equation (2)

where A R is the ground motion slope ratio of spectral accelerations, frequency by frequency, from a seismic hazard curve corresponding to a 10-fold reduction in hazard exceedance frequency;

therefore, A R = mean 1 E-05 UHRS ÷ mean 1 E-04 UHRSEquation (3)

Figure 2 provides a comparison of the performance-based, site-specific horizontal GMRS and the mean 1 E-04 and 1 E-05 UHRS.

The above is based on the assumption that the hazard curves are approximated by a power law equation (i.e., linear on a log-log plot) in the range of 1 E-04 to 1 E-0

5. If A

R is greater than 4.2, then this assumption is not valid. In these cases, it is acceptable to use a value equal to 45 percent of the mean 1

E-05 UHRS. Using this method, results in a GMRS that achieves the annual FOSID target of 1 E-05.5.2Vertical Spectrum Vertical response spectra are developed by combining the appropriate horizontal response spectra and the most up-to-date V/H response spectral ratios appropriate for either CEUS or WUS sites.

Appropriate V/H ratios for CEUS or WUS rock and soil sites are best determined from the most up-to-

date attenuation relations. However, as there are currently no CEUS attenuation relations that predict

vertical ground motions, appropriate V/H ratios for CEUS rock sites provided in Reference 6 may be

used. For CEUS soil sites, References 6 and 22 describe a procedure to determine a WUS-to-CEUS

transfer function that may be used to modify the WUS V/H soil ratios. Other methods used to determine

V/H ratios may also be appropriate.5.3Location of the Site Ground Motion Response Spectrum The horizontal and vertical GMRS are determined in the free field on the ground surface. For sites with soil layers near the surface that will be completely excavated to expose competent material, the

GMRS are specified on the outcrop or hypothetical outcrop that will exist after excavatio

n. Motions at

this hypothetical outcrop should be developed as a free surface motion, not as an in-column motion.

Although the definition of competent material is not mandated by regulation, a number of reactor designs

have specified a shear wave velocity of 1,000 fps as the definition of competent materia

l. When the

GMRS are determined as free-field outcrop motions on the uppermost in-situ competent material, only

the effects of the materials below this elevation are included in the site response analysis.

RG 1.208, Page 195.4Determination of Safe Shutdown Earthquake The SSE is the vibratory ground motion for which certain structures, systems, and components are designed to remain functional, pursuant to Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50. The SSE for the site is

characterized by both horizontal and vertical free-field ground motion response spectra at the free ground

surface. The purpose of this regulatory guide is to provide guidance on the development of the

site-specific GMRS. The GMRS satisfy the requirements of 10 CFR 100.23 with respect to the

development of the SSE. In the performance-based approach described in this guide, the GMRS are

based on the site-specific UHRS at the free-field ground surface modified by a design factor to obtain the

performance-based site-specific response spectrum. The design factor achieves a relatively consistent

annual probability of plant component failure across the range of plant locations and structural

frequencies.

The steps necessary to develop the final SSE are described in Chapter 3, "Design of Structures, Components, Equipment, and Systems," of NUREG-0800, "Standard Review Plan." This process is

defined by two distinct options. The first option is for COL applicants using a standard design nuclear

power plant. The standard designs use broad-band smooth response spectra, referred to as certified

seismic design response spectra (CSDRS). The CSDRS are site-independent seismic design response

spectra scaled to a peak ground motion value. Under the first option or combined license procedure, the

GMRS are used to determine the adequacy of the CSDRS for the site. If adequate, the CSDRS become

the SSE for the site. Alternatively, under the second option an applicant would develop a site-specific

nuclear power plant design based on a site SSE. For some sites the GMRS may not contain adequate

energy in the frequency range of engineering interest and, therefore, may not be appropriate as the

site-specific plant SSE. For these situations the GMRS could either be broadened or enveloped by a

smoothed spectrum.

During the design phase, an additional check of the ground motion is required at the foundation level. According to Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50, the foundation level ground motion must be

represented by an appropriate response spectrum with a peak ground acceleration of at least 0.1

g. The

steps necessary to determine the final SSE, such as the acceptability of the CSDRS for a given site and

the minimum seismic design-basis requirements, are described in Chapter 3 of NUREG-0800.

RG 1.208, Page 20Figure 2. Comparison of the Mean 1 E-04 and 1 E-05 Uniform Hazard ResponseSpectra and the Performance-Based Ground Motion Response Spectrum (GMRS)

Mean UHRS 1E-5

Mean UHRS 1E-4

Performance-Based GMRS

RG 1.208, Page 21

D. IMPLEMENTATION

The purpose of this section is to provide information to applicants regarding the NRC staff's plans for using this regulatory guide. No backfitting is intended or approved in connection with its

issuance.This regulatory guide identifies methods that the NRC staff considers acceptable for (1)

conducting geological, geophysical, seismological, and geotechnical investigations, (2) identifying and

characterizing seismic sources, (3) conducting probabilistic seismic hazard analyses, (4) determining

seismic wave transmission characteristics of soil and rock sites, and (5) determining a performance-based

site-specific GMRS, for satisfying the requirements of 10 CFR 100.23. A brief overview of techniques

to develop the SSE in order to satisfy the requirements of Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50 is also included

in this guide and in NUREG-0800, "Standard Review Plan," Section 3.7.1.

REGULATORY ANALYSIS / BACKFIT ANALYSIS

The regulatory analysis and backfit analysis for this regulatory guide are available in Draft Regulatory Guide DG-1146, "A Performance-Based Approach to Define the Site-Specific Earthquake

Ground Motion" (Ref. 23). The NRC issued DG-1146 in October 2006 to solicit public comment on the

draft version of Regulatory Guide 1.208.

4 All NRC regulations listed herein are available electronically through the Public Electronic Reading Room on the NRC's public Web site, at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/doc-collections/cfr/. Copies are also available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, MD; the PDR's

mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737 or (800) 397-4209; fax (301)

415-3548; email PDR@nrc.gov

.5 All NUREG-series reports listed herein were published by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission. Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, MD; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737 or

(800) 397-4209; fax (301) 415-3548; email PDR@nrc.gov. Copies are also available at current rates from the U.S.

Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, Washington, DC 20402-9328, telephone (202) 512-1800; or from the

National Technical Information Service (NTIS) at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, Virginia 22161, online at

http://www.ntis.gov , by telephone at (800) 553-NTIS (6847) or (703) 605-6000, or by fax to (703) 605-6900.

NUREG-0800 is also available electronically through the Electronic Reading Room on the NRC's public Web site, at

http://www.nrc.gov/ reading-rm/doc-collections/nuregs/

.6 All regulatory guides listed herein were published by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commissio

n. Where an accession

number is identified, the specified regulatory guide is available electronically through the NRC's Agencywide

Documents Access and Management System (ADAMS) at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/adams.html. All other regulatory guides are available electronically through the Public Electronic Reading Room on the NRC's public Web

site, at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/doc-collections/reg-guides/. Single copies of regulatory guides may also be obtained free of charge by writing the Reproduction and Distribution Services Section, ADM, USNRC, Washington, DC 20555-0001, or by fax to (301) 415-2289, or by email to DISTRIBUTION@nrc.gov. Active guides may also be purchased from the National Technical Information Service (NTIS) on a standing order basis. Details on this service

may be obtained by contacting NTIS at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, Virginia 22161, online at

http://www.ntis.gov , by telephone at (800) 553-NTIS (6847) or (703) 605-6000, or by fax to (703) 605-6900. Copies are also available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room (PDR), which is located

at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, Maryland; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555-

0001. The PDR can also be reached by telephone at (301) 415-4737 or (800) 397-4209, by fax at (301) 415-3548, and

by email to PDR@nrc.gov

.RG 1.208, Page 22 REFERENCES

1.U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Energy, Part 100, "Reactor Site Criteria."

4 2.U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Energy, Part 50, "Domestic Licensing of Production and Utilization Facilities."

5 3.U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Energy, Part 52, "Licenses, Certifications, and Approvals for Nuclear Power Plants."

54.NUREG-0800, "Standard Review Plan for the Review of Safety Analysis Reports for Nuclear Power Plants," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.

55.Regulatory Guide 1.165, "Identification and Characterization of Seismic Sources and Determination of Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory

Commission, Washington, DC.

6

7 Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, MD; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737

or (800) 397-4209; fax (301) 415-3548; email PDR@nrc.gov. In addition, copies are available at current rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, Washington, DC 20402-9328, telephone (202) 512-1800; or

from the National Technical Information Service (NTIS) at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, Virginia 22161, online

at http://www.ntis.gov , by telephone at (800) 553-NTIS (6847) or (703) 605-6000, or by fax to (703) 605-6900.

8 Copies may be purchased from the American Society for Civil Engineers (ASCE), 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20190 [phone: 800-548-ASCE (2723)]. Purchase information is available through the ASCE Web site at

http://www.asce.org/bookstore/book.cfm?isbn=0784407622

9 Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room at 11555 Rockville

Pike, Rockville, MD; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737

or (800) 397-4209; fax (301) 415-3548; email PDR@nrc.gov

.RG 1.208, Page 236.McGuire, R.K., W.J. Silva, and C.J. Costantino, "Technical Basis for Revision of Regulatory Guidance on Design Ground Motions: Hazard- and Risk-Consistent Ground Motion Spectra

Guidelines," NUREG/CR-6728, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC,

October 2001.

77.ASCE/SEI 43-05, "Seismic Design Criteria for Structures, Systems, and Components in Nuclear Facilities," American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute, 2005.

88.Regulatory Guide 1.60, "Design Response Spectra for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants,"

U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.

79.Budnitz, R.J., et al., "Recommendations for Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis: Guidance on Uncertainty and Use of Experts," NUREG/CR-6372, Volumes 1 and 2, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory

Commission, Washington, DC, April 1997.

810.Pacific Gas and Electric Company, "Final Report of the Diablo Canyon Long-Term Seismic Program: Diablo Canyon Power Plant," Docket Nos. 50-275 and 50-323, 1988.

911.Rood, H., et al., "Safety Evaluation Report Related to the Operation of Diablo Canyon Nuclear Power Plant, Units 1 and 2," NUREG-0675, Supplement No. 34, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory

Commission, Washington, DC, June 1991.

812.Sorensen, G., Washington Public Power Supply System, Letter to Document Control Branch, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, Subject: "Nuclear Project No. 3, Resolution of Key Licensing Issues, Response," February 29, 1988.

1013.Bernreuter, D.L., et al., "Seismic Hazard Characterization of 69 Nuclear Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains," NUREG/CR-5250, Volumes 1-8, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, January 1989.

814.Sobel, P., "Revised Livermore Seismic Hazard Estimates for Sixty-Nine Nuclear Power Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains," NUREG-1488, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, April 1994.

815.Savy, J.B., et al., "Eastern Seismic Hazard Characterization Update," UCRL-ID-115111, Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, June 1993 (Accession #9310190318 in the NRC's

Public Document Room).

10

10Draft Regulatory Guide DG-1146 is available electronically under Accession #ML063030291 in the NRC'sAgencywide Documents Access and Management System (ADAMS) at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/adams.html. Copies are also available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC's Public Document Room (PDR), which is located at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville Maryland; the PDR's mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC

20555-0001. The PDR can also be reached by telephone at (301) 415-4737 or (800) 397-4209, by fax at (301) 415-3548, and by email to PDR@nrc.gov

.RG 1.208, Page 2416.Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), "Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Evaluations at Nuclear Power Plant Sites in the Central and Eastern United States," NP-4726, All Volumes, 1989-1991.17.Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), "The Earthquakes of Stable Continental Regions,"

Volume 1: Assessment of Large Earthquake Potential, EPRI TR-102261-V1, 1994.18.Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) and U.S. Department of Energy (DOE), "Program on Technology Innovation: Use of Minimum CAV in Determining Effects of Small Magnitude

Earthquakes on Seismic Hazard Analyses," Report 1012965, December 2005.19.Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) and U.S. Department of Energy (DOE), "Program on Technology Innovation: Truncation of the Lognormal Distribution and Value of the Standard

Deviation for Ground Motion Models in the Central and Eastern United States," Report 1013105, February 2006.20.Regulatory Guide 1.132, "Site Investigations for Foundations of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S.

Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.

721.Regulatory Guide 1.138, "Laboratory Investigations of Soils and Rocks for Engineering Analysis and Design of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.

722.McGuire, R.K., W.J. Silva, and C.J. Costantino, "Technical Basis for Revision of Regulatory Guidance on Design Ground Motions: Development of Hazard- and Risk-Consistent Seismic

Spectra for Two Sites," NUREG/CR-6769, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, April 2002.

823.Draft Regulatory Guide DG-1146, "A Performance-Based Approach to Define the Site-Specific Earthquake Ground Motion," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.

10

Appendix A to RG 1.208, Page A-1 APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS

Accepted PSHA Model.

An accepted PSHA model is a method of conducting a Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis (including the seismic sources and ground motion equations) that has been developed

using Senior Seismic Hazard Analysis Committee (SSHAC) guidelines and that has been reviewed and

accepted by the NRC in the past either for generic application (e.g., the 1989 studies by LLNL and EPRI,

with the inherent seismic source description for the CEUS) or as part of an ESP or COL application.

Accepted PSHA models are starting points for developing probabilistic seismic hazard calculations for

new ESP or COL applications, yet must be updated with new information on seismicity, geology, geophysics, and ground motion equations, as appropriate for a site that is being reviewe

d. The term

accepted PSHA model should not be assumed to imply that the model can be used without updates or

reviews as discussed RG 1.208.

Capable Tectonic Source.

A capable tectonic source is a tectonic structure that can generate both vibratory ground motion and tectonic surface deformation such as faulting or folding at or near the earth's

surface in the present seismotectonic regime. It is described by at least one of the following:

characteristics:(1)presence of surface or near-surface deformation of landforms or geologic deposits of a recurring nature within the last approximately 500,000 years or at least once in the last approximately

50,000 years(2)a reasonable association with one or more moderate to large earthquakes or sustained earthquake activity that are usually accompanied by significant surface deformation(3)a structural association with a capable tectonic source that has characteristics of either item a or b (above), such that movement on one could be reasonably expected to be accompanied by

movement on the other In some cases, the geological evidence of past activity at or near the ground surface along a potential capable tectonic source may be obscured at a particular site. This might occur, for example, at a site

having a deep overburden. For these cases, evidence may exist elsewhere along the structure from which

an evaluation of its characteristics in the vicinity of the site can be reasonably base

d. Such evidence is to

be used in determining whether the structure is a capable tectonic source within this definition.

Notwithstanding the foregoing paragraphs, the association of a structure with geological structures that

are at least pre-Quaternary, such as many of those found in the central and eastern regions of the United

States, in the absence of conflicting evidence, will demonstrate that the structure is not a capable tectonic

source within this definition.

Certified Seismic Design Response Spectra (CSDRS).

Site-independent seismic design response spectra that have been approved under Subpart B of 10 CFR Part 52 as the seismic design response

spectra for an approved certified standard design nuclear power plant. The input or control location for

the CSDRS is specified in the certified standard design.

Appendix A to RG 1.208, Page A-2 Combined License. A combined construction permit and operating license with conditions for a nuclear power facility issued pursuant to Subpart C of 10 CFR Part 52.

Controlling Earthquakes. Earthquakes used to determine spectral shapes or to estimate ground motions at the site for some methods of dynamic site response. There may be several controlling earthquakes for

a site. As a result of the probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA), controlling earthquakes are

characterized as mean magnitudes and distances derived from a deaggregation analysis of the mean

estimate of the PSHA.

Cumulative Absolute Velocity (CAV). For each component of the free-field ground motion, the CAV

should be calculated as follows: (1) the absolute acceleration (g units) time-history is divided into

1-second intervals, (2) each 1-second interval that has at least 1 exceedance of 0.025g is integrated over

time, and (3) all the integrated values are summed together to arrive at the CAV. The CAV is exceeded

if the calculation is greater than 0.16 g-second. The application of the CAV in siting requires the

development of a CAV model (Ref. 18) because the PSHA calculation does not use time histories

directly.Deaggregation. The process for determining the fractional contribution of each magnitude-distance pair to the total seismic hazard. To accomplish this, a set of magnitude and distance bins are selected and the

annual probability of exceeding selected ground acceleration parameters from each magnitude-distance

pair is computed and divided by the total probability for earthquakes.

Design Factor.

The ratio between the site-specific GMRS and the UHRS. The design factor is aimed at achieving the target annual probability of failure associated with the target performance goals.

Early Site Permit. A Commission approval, issued pursuant to Subpart A of 10 CFR Part 52, for a site or sites for one or more nuclear power facilities.

Earthquake Recurrence. The frequency of occurrence of earthquakes as a function of magnitude.

Recurrence relationships or curves are developed for each seismic source, and they reflect the frequency

of occurrence (usually expressed on an annual basis) of magnitudes up to the maximum, including

measures of uncertainty.

Frequency of Onset of Significant Inelastic Deformation (FOSID). The annual probability of the onset of significant inelastic deformation (OSID). OSID is just beyond the occurrence of insignificant (or localized) inelastic deformation, and in this way corresponds to "essentially elastic behavior." As

such, OSID of a structure, system, or component (SSC) can be expected to occur well before seismically

induced core damage, resulting in much larger frequencies of OSID than seismic core damage frequency (SCDF) values. In fact, OSID occurs before SSC "failure," where the term failure refers to impaired

functionality.

Ground Motion Response Spectra (GMRS).

A site-specific ground motion response spectra characterized by horizontal and vertical response spectra determined as free-field motions on the ground

surface or as free-field outcrop motions on the uppermost in-situ competent material using

performance-based procedures. When the GMRS are determined as free-field outcrop motions on the

uppermost in-situ competent material, only the effects of the materials below this elevation are included

in the site response analysis.

Appendix A to RG 1.208, Page A-3 Ground Motion Slope Ratio. Ratio of the spectral accelerations, frequency by frequency, from a seismic hazard curve corresponding to a 10-fold reduction in hazard exceedance frequency. (See

Equation 3 in Regulatory Position 5.1.)

In-column Motion. Motion that is within a soil column, as opposed to the motion at the surface or treated as if it is at the surface.

Intensity. The intensity of an earthquake is a qualitative description of the effects of the earthquake at a particular location, as evidenced by observed effects on humans, on human-built structures, and on the

earth's surface at a particular location. Commonly used scales to specify intensity are the Rossi-Forel, Mercalli, and Modified Mercalli. The Modified Mercalli Intensity (MMI) scale describes intensities with

values ranging from I to XII in the order of severity. MMI of I indicates an earthquake that was not felt

except by a very few, whereas MMI of XII indicates total damage of all works of construction, either

partially or completely.

Magnitude. An earthquake's magnitude is a measure of the strength of the earthquake as determined from seismographic observations and is an objective, quantitative measure of the size of an earthquake.

The magnitude can be expressed in various ways based on seismographic records (e.g., Richter Local

Magnitude, Surface Wave Magnitude, Body Wave Magnitude, and Moment Magnitude). Currently, the

most commonly used magnitude measurement is the Moment Magnitude, M

w , which is based on the seismic moment computed as the rupture force along the fault multiplied by the average amount of slip, and thus is a direct measure of the energy released during an earthquake.

Maximum Magnitude. The maximum magnitude is the upper bound to earthquake recurrence curves.

Mean Site Amplification Function. The mean amplification function is obtained for each controlling earthquake, by dividing the response spectrum from the computed surface motion by the response

spectrum from the input hard rock motion, and computing the arithmetic mean of the individual response

spectral ratios.

Nontectonic Deformation. Nontectonic deformation is distortion of surface or near-surface soils or rocks that is not directly attributable to tectonic activity. Such deformation includes features associated

with subsidence, karst terrain, glaciation or deglaciation, and growth faulting.

Response Spectrum.

A plot of the maximum responses (acceleration, velocity, or displacement) of idealized single-degree-of-freedom oscillators as a function of the natural frequencies of the oscillators

for a given damping value. The response spectrum is calculated for a specified vibratory motion input at

the oscillators' supports.

Ring Area. Annular region bounded by radii associated with the distance rings used in hazard deaggregation (Table D.1, "Recommended Magnitude and Distance Bins," in Appendix D to this

regulatory guide).

Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE). The vibratory ground motion for which certain structures, systems, and components are designed, pursuant to Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50, to remain

functional. The SSE for the site is characterized by both horizontal and vertical free-field ground motion

response spectra at the free ground surface.

Appendix A to RG 1.208, Page A-4 Seismic Wave Transmission (Site Amplification). The amplification (increase or decrease) of earthquake ground motion by rock and soil near the earth's surface in the vicinity of the site of interest.

Topographic effects, the effect of the water table, and basin edge wave-propagation effects are sometimes

included under site response.

Seismogenic Source. A portion of the earth that is assumed to have a uniform earthquake potential (same expected maximum earthquake and recurrence frequency), distinct from that of surrounding

sources. A seismogenic source will generate vibratory ground motion but is assumed to not cause surface

displacement. Seismogenic sources cover a wide range of seismotectonic conditions, from a well-defined

tectonic structure to simply a large region of diffuse seismicity.

Spectral Acceleration. Peak acceleration response of an oscillator as a function of period or frequency and damping ratio when subjected to an acceleration time history. It is equal to the peak relative

displacement of a linear oscillator of frequency, f, attached to the ground, times the quantity (2f)2. It is expressed in units of gravity (g) or cm/second

2.Stable Continental Region (SCR). An SCR is composed of continental crust, including continental shelves, slopes, and attenuated continental crust, and excludes active plate boundaries and zones of

currently active tectonics directly influenced by plate margin processes. It exhibits no significant

deformation associated with the major Mesozoic-to-Cenozoic (last 240 million years) orogenic belts. It

excludes major zones of Neogene (last 25 million years) rifting, volcanism, or suturing.

Stationary Poisson Process. A probabilistic model of the occurrence of an event over time (or space)

that has the following characteristics: (1) the occurrence of the event in small intervals is constant over

time (or space), (2) the occurrence of two (or more) events in a small interval is negligible, and (3) the

occurrence of the event in non-overlapping intervals is independent.

Target Performance Goal (P

F). Target annual probability of exceeding the 1 E-05 frequency of onset of significant inelastic deformation (FOSID) limit state.

Tectonic Structure. A large-scale dislocation or distortion, usually within the earth's crust. Its extent may be on the order of tens of meters (yards) to hundreds of kilometers (miles).

Uniform Hazard Response Spectrum (UHRS). A plot of a ground response parameter (for example, spectral acceleration or spectral velocity) that has an equal likelihood of exceedance at different

frequencies.

Within Motion. An earthquake record modified for use in a site response model. Within motions are developed through deconvolution of a surface recording to account for the properties of the overburden

material at the level at which the record is to be applied. The within motion can also be called the

"bedrock motion" if it occurs at a high-impedance boundary where rock is first encountered.

Appendix B to RG 1.208, Page B-1 APPENDIX B

ABBREVIATIONSApeak ground accelerationADAMSAgencywide Documents Access and Management System (NRC)

A R ground motion slope ratioASCEAmerican Society of Civil Engineers ASTMAmerican Society of Testing and MaterialsCAVcumulative absolute velocity CFR Code of Federal RegulationsCPconstruction permit CEUScentral and eastern United States COLcombined license CSDRScertified seismic design response spectraDdistanceDpeak ground displacement DFdesign factor DOEU.S. Department of Energy DRSdesign response spectrumEPRIElectric Power Research InstituteESPearly site permitFIRSfoundation input response spectraFOSIDfrequency of onset of significant inelastic deformationGMRSground motion response spectra

H D mean annual hazard exceedance frequency/probabilityIAEAInternational Atomic Energy Agency LLNLLawrence Livermore National Laboratory MmagnitudeMMIModified Mercalli IntensityNGANext Generation AttenuationNRCU.S. Nuclear Regulatory CommissionOLoperating licenseOMBOffice of Management and Budget OSIDonset of significant inelastic deformation Appendix B to RG 1.208, Page B-2 P F target performance goalPDRPublic Document Room (NRC)

PGApeak ground acceleration PGVpeak ground velocity PSHAprobabilistic seismic hazard analysis R P probability ratioRVTrandom vibration theorySCDFseismic core damage frequencySCRstable continental region SDCseismic design category SRPStandard Review Plan (NUREG-0800)

SSCsstructures, systems, and components SSEsafe shutdown earthquake ground motion SSHACSenior Seismic Hazard Analysis Committee StandardASCE/SEI Standard 43-05 (Ref. 7)UHRSuniform hazard response spectrumUSNRCU.S. Nuclear Regulatory CommissionVpeak ground velocityV/Hratio of vertical to horizontal spectral accelerations

V s shear wave velocityWUSwestern United States Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-1 APPENDIX C

INVESTIGATIONS TO CHARACTERIZE

SITE GEOLOGY, SEISMOLOGY AND GEOPHYSICSC.1Introduction As characterized for use in probabilistic seismic hazard analyses (PSHA), seismogenic sources are zones within which future earthquakes are likely to occur. Geological, seismological, and

geophysical investigations provide the information needed to identify and characterize source zone

parameters, such as size and geometry, and to estimate earthquake recurrence rates and maximum

magnitudes. The amount of data available about earthquakes and their causative sources varies

substantially between the western United States (WUS) (west of the Rocky Mountain front) and the

central and eastern United States (CEUS), or stable continental region (east of the Rocky Mountain

front). Furthermore, there are variations in the amount and quality of data within these regions.

Seismogenic sources in active tectonic regions such as the WUS are generally readily identified because of their relatively high activity rate. In the CEUS, identifying seismogenic sources is more

difficult because their activity rate is relatively low and because most seismic sources are covered by

thick deposits. However, several significant tectonic structures exist and some of these have been

interpreted as seismogenic sources (e.g., the New Madrid fault zone, Nemaha Ridge, and Meers fault).

In the CEUS, it is most likely that the determination of the properties of the seismogenic source, whether it is a tectonic structure or a broad areal source zone, will be inferred rather than demonstrated

by strong correlations with seismicity or geologic data. Moreover, it is not generally known what

relationships exist between observed tectonic structures in a seismic source within the CEUS and the

current earthquake activity that may be associated with that source. The historical seismicity record, the

results of regional and site studies, and expert judgment play key roles in characterizing a source zone.

If, on the other hand, strong correlations and data exist suggesting a relationship between seismicity and

seismic sources, approaches used for more active tectonic regions can be applied. Reference C.1 may be

used to assess potential for large earthquakes.

The primary objective of geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations is to develop an up-to-date, site-specific earth science database that supports site characterization and a site-specific

PSHA. The results of these investigations will also be used to assess whether new data and their

interpretation are consistent with the information used in recent probabilistic seismic hazard studies

accepted by NRC staff. If new data, such as new seismic sources and new ground motion attenuation

relationships, are consistent with the existing earth science database, updating or modification of the

information used in the site-specific hazard analysis is not required. It will be necessary to update

seismic sources and ground motion attenuation relationships for sites where there is significant new

information provided by the site investigation.

Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-2 The following are to be evaluated for seismic source characterization:*Evaluation of seismic source location and geometry (location and extent, both surface and subsurface). This evaluation will normally require interpretations of available geological, geophysical, and seismological data in the source region by multiple experts or a team of experts.

The evaluation should include interpretations of the seismic potential of each source and

relationships among seismic sources in the region to express uncertainty in the evaluations.

Seismic source evaluations generally develop four types of sources: (1) fault sources, (2) area

sources representing concentrated historic seismicity not associated with known tectonic

structure, (3) area sources representing geographic regions with similar tectonic histories, type of

crust, and structural features, and (4) background sources. Background sources are generally

used to express uncertainty in the overall seismic source configuration interpreted for the site

region. Acceptable approaches for evaluating and characterizing uncertainties for input to a

seismic hazard calculation are contained in NUREG/CR-6372 (Ref. C.2).*Evaluations of earthquake recurrence for each seismic source, including recurrence rate and recurrence model. These evaluations normally draw most heavily on historical and instrumental

seismicity associated with each source and paleoearthquake information. Preferred methods and

approaches for evaluating and characterizing uncertainty in earthquake recurrence generally will

depend on the type of source. Acceptable methods are described in NUREG/CR-6372 (Ref.

C.2).*Evaluations of the maximum earthquake magnitude for each seismic source. These evaluations will draw on a broad range of source-specific tectonic characteristics, including tectonic history

and available seismicity data. Uncertainty in this evaluation should normally be expressed as a

maximum magnitude distribution. Preferred methods and information for evaluating and

characterizing maximum earthquakes for seismic sources vary with the type of source.

Acceptable methods are contained in NUREG/CR-6372 (Ref. C.2).*Other evaluations, depending on the geologic setting of a site, such as local faults that have a history of Quaternary (last 1.8 million years) displacements, sense of slip on faults, fault length

and width, area of faults, age of displacements, estimated displacement per event, estimated

earthquake magnitude per offset event, orientations of regional tectonic stresses with respect to

faults, and the possibility of seismogenic folds. Capable tectonic sources are not always exposed

at the ground surface (such as blind thrust faults) in the WUS as demonstrated by the buried

reverse causative faults of the 1983 Coalinga, 1988 Whittier Narrows, l989 Loma Prieta, and

1994 Northridge earthquakes. These examples emphasize the need to conduct thorough

investigations not only at the ground surface but also in the subsurface to identify structures at

seismogenic depths. Regional topographic features should also be closely studie

d. Whenever

faults or other structures are encountered at a site (including sites in the CEUS) in either outcrop

or excavations, it is necessary to perform adequately detailed specific investigations to determine

whether or not they are seismogenic or may cause surface deformation at the sit

e. Acceptable

methods for performing these investigations are contained in NUREG/CR-5503 (Ref. C.3).

Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-3C.2.Investigations To Evaluate Seismic SourcesC.2.1General Investigations of the site and region around the site are necessary to identify capable tectonic sources and to determine their potential for generating earthquakes and causing surface deformatio

n. If it

is determined that surface deformation need not be taken into account at the site, sufficient data to clearly

justify this determination should be presented in the application for an early site permit or license.

Generally, any tectonic deformation at the earth's surface within the Site Area [8 km (5 mi)of the site]

will require detailed examination to determine its significance. Potentially active tectonic deformation

within the seismogenic zone beneath a site will have to be assessed using geological, geophysical and

seismological methods to determine its significance. Engineering solutions are generally available to

mitigate the potential vibratory effects of earthquakes through design. However, engineering solutions

cannot always be demonstrated to be adequate for mitigation of the effects of permanent ground

displacement phenomena such as surface faulting or folding, subsidence, or ground collaps

e. For this

reason, it is prudent to select an alternative site when the potential exists for permanent ground

displacement at the proposed site (Ref. C.4).

The level of detail for investigations should be governed by knowledge of the current and late Quaternary tectonic regime and the geological complexity of the site and region. The investigations for

determining seismic sources should be carried out in all the following levels, with areas described by

radii of 320 km (200 mi) (Site Region), 40 km (25 mi) (Site Vicinity), and 8 km (5 mi) (Site Area) and 1

km (0.6 mi) (Site Location) from the site. The investigations should provide increasingly detailed

information as they proceed from the regional level down to the site (e.g., from Site Region to Site

Location). Whenever faults or other structures are encountered at a site in either outcrop or excavations, it is necessary to perform many of the investigations described below to determine whether or not they

are capable tectonic sources.

C.2.1.1 Site Region Investigations [within radii of 320 km (200 mi) - 40 km (25 mi) of the site]

The Site Region investigations should be planned to identify seismic sources and describe the Quaternary tectonic regime. The data should have a resolution consistent with a map developed at a

scale of 1:500,000 or larger. The investigations are not expected to be extensive or in detail, but should

include a comprehensive literature review supplemented by focused geological reconnaissances based on

the results of the literature study (including topographic, geologic, aeromagnetic, and gravity maps, and

airphotos). Some detailed investigations at specific locations within the region may be necessary if

potential seismic sources that may be significant for determining the safe shutdown earthquake ground

motion (SSE) are identified.

The large size of the area for the regional investigations is necessary because of the possibility that all significant seismic sources, or alternative configurations, may not have been captured or

enveloped by existing PSHA source databases. Thus, the large area will increase the chances of (1)

identifying evidence for unknown seismic sources that might extend close enough for earthquake ground

motions generated by that source to affect the site, and (2) confirming the PSHA's database.

Furthermore, because of the relative rarity of seismic activity in the CEUS, the area should be large

enough to include as many historical and instrumentally recorded earthquakes for analysis as reasonably

possible. The specified area of study is expected to be large enough to incorporate any previously

identified sources that could be analogous to sources that may underlie or be relatively close to the site.

In past licensing activities for sites in the CEUS, it has often been necessary, because of the absence of

datable horizons overlying bedrock, to extend investigations out many tens or hundreds of kilometers Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-4 from the site along a structure or to an outlying analogous structure to locate overlying datable strata or unconformities so that geochronological methods could be applied. This procedure has also been used to

estimate the age of an undatable seismic source in the Site Vicinity by relating its time of last activity to

that of a similar, previously evaluated structure, or a known tectonic episode, the evidence of which may

be many tens or hundreds of kilometers away.

It is necessary to evaluate the geological, seismological, and geophysical data obtained from the site-specific investigations to demonstrate that the data are sufficient and consistent with the PSHA

methodology. Specifically, the evaluation may need to include (but is not limited to) seismic source

characterization, ground motion attenuation relationships and other PSHA-related contents (such as low-

magnitude threshold and magnitude conversion relationships). If new information identified by the site-

specific investigations were to result in a significant increase in the hazard estimate for a site, and if this

new information were validated by a strong technical basis, the PSHA might have to be modified to

incorporate the new technical information. Using sensitivity studies, it may also be possible to justify a

lower hazard estimate with an exceptionally strong technical basis. However, it is expected that large

uncertainties in estimating seismic hazard in the CEUS will continue to exist in the future, and

substantial delays in the licensing process will result from trying to justify a lower value with respect to a

specific site.

C.2.1.2 Site Vicinity Investigations [within radii of 40 km (25 mi) - 8 km (5 mi) of the site]

Reconnaissance-level investigations, which may need to be supplemented at specific locations by more detailed explorations such as geologic mapping, geophysical surveying, borings, and trenching, should be conducted for the Site Vicinity; the data should have a resolution consistent with a map

developed at a scale of 1:50,000 or larger.

C.2.1.3 Site Area Investigations [within radii of 8 km (5 mi) - 1 km (0.6 mi) of the site]

Detailed investigations should be carried out within the Site Area, and the resulting data should have a resolution consistent with a map developed at a scale of 1:5,000 or large

r. The level of

investigations should be in sufficient detail to delineate the geology and the potential for tectonic

deformation at or near the ground surface. The investigations should use the methods described in the

following subsections that are appropriate for the tectonic regime to characterize seismic sources.

The areas of investigations may be asymmetrical and may cover larger areas than those described above in regions of late Quaternary activity, regions with high rates of historical seismic activity (felt or

instrumentally recorded data), or sites that are located near a capable tectonic source such as a fault zone.

Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-5C.2.2Contents of Site Vicinity and Site Area Investigations The following methods are suggested but they are not all-inclusive and investigations should not be limited to them. Some procedures will not be applicable to every site, and situations will occur that

require investigations that are not included in the following discussion. It is anticipated that new

technologies will be available in the future that will be applicable to these investigations.

C.2.2.1 Surface Investigations Surface exploration to assess the geology and geologic structure of the Site Area is dependent on the Site Location and may be carried out with the use of any appropriate combination of the geological, geophysical, seismological, and geotechnical engineering techniques summarized in the following

paragraphs. However, it is not necessary for all of these methods to be carried out at a given site.

C.2.2.1.1 Geological interpretations should be performed of aerial photographs and other remote-sensing imagery, as appropriate for the particular site conditions, to assist in identifying rock

outcrops, faults and other tectonic features, fracture traces, geologic contacts, lineaments, soil conditions, and evidence of landslides or soil liquefaction.

C.2.2.1.2 Mapping topographic, geomorphic, and hydrologic features should be performed at scales and with contour intervals suitable for analysis and descriptions of stratigraphy (particularly

Quaternary), surface tectonic structures such as fault zones, and Quaternary geomorphic feature

s. For

coastal sites, or sites located near lakes or rivers, this includes topography, geomorphology (particularly

mapping marine and fluvial terraces), bathymetry, submarine landslides, geophysics (such as seismic

reflection), and hydrographic surveys to the extent needed to describe the site area features.

C.2.2.1.3 Vertical crustal movements should be evaluated using (1) geodetic land surveying and (2) geological analyses (such as analysis of regional dissection and degradation patterns),

shorelines, fluvial adjustments (such as changes in stream longitudinal profiles or terraces), and other

long-term changes (such as elevation changes across lava flows).

C.2.2.1.4 Analysis should be performed to determine the tectonic significance of offset, displaced, or anomalous landforms such as displaced stream channels or changes in stream profiles or the

upstream migration of knickpoints; abrupt changes in fluvial deposits or terraces; changes in paleo-

channels across a fault; or uplifted, down-dropped, or laterally displaced marine terraces.

C.2.2.1.5 Analysis should be performed to determine the tectonic significance of Quaternary sedimentary deposits within or near tectonic zones, such as fault zones, including (1) fault-

related or fault-controlled deposits such as sag ponds, graben fill deposits, and colluvial wedges formed

by the erosion of a fault paleo-scarp and (2) non-fault-related, but offset, deposits such as alluvial fans, debris cones, fluvial terrace, and lake shoreline deposits.

C.2.2.1.6 Identification and analysis should be performed of deformation features caused by vibratory ground motions, including seismically induced liquefaction features (sand boils, explosion

craters, lateral spreads, settlement, soil flows), mud volcanoes, landslides, rockfalls, deformed lake

deposits or soil horizons, shear zones, cracks, or fissures.

Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-6 C.2.2.1.7 Analysis should be performed of fault displacements, including the interpretion of the morphology of topographic fault scarps associated with or produced by surface ruptur

e. Fault

scarp morphology is useful in estimating the age of last displacement [in conjunction with the appropriate

geochronological methods described in NUREG/CR-5562 (Ref. C.5)], approximate magnitude of the

associated earthquake, recurrence intervals, slip rate, and the nature of the causative fault at depth.

C.2.2.2 Subsurface Investigation Contents Subsurface investigations at the site to identify and describe potential seismic sources and to obtain required geotechnical information are described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. C.6). The

investigations include, but may not be confined to, the following.

C.2.2.2.1 Geophysical investigations useful in the past include magnetic and gravity surveys, seismic reflection and seismic refraction surveys, bore-hole geophysics, electrical surveys, and

ground-penetrating radar surveys.

C.2.2.2.2 Core borings to map subsurface geology and obtain samples for testing such as determining the properties of the subsurface soils and rocks and geochronological analysis.

C.2.2.2.3 Excavating and logging of trenches across geological features to obtain samples for the geochronological analysis of those features.

C.2.2.2.4 At some sites, deep unconsolidated material/soil, bodies of water, or other material may obscure geologic evidence of past activity along a tectonic structure. In such cases, the

analysis of evidence elsewhere along the structure can be used to evaluate its characteristics in the

vicinity of the site.

In the CEUS it may not be possible to reasonably demonstrate the age of youngest activity on a tectonic structure with adequate deterministic certainty. In such cases, the uncertainty should be

quantified; the NRC staff will accept evaluations using the methods described in NUREG/CR-5503 (Ref.

C.3). A demonstrated tectonic association of such structures with geologic structural features or tectonic

processes that are geologically old (at least pre-Quaternary) should be acceptable as an age indicator in

the absence of conflicting evidence.C.2.3Site Location Investigations

[within 1 km (0.6 mi)]

Data from Site Location investigations should have a resolution consistent with a map developed at a scale of 1:500 or larger. Important aspects of the site investigations are the excavation and logging

of exploratory trenches and the mapping of the excavations for the plant structures, particularly those that

are characterized as Seismic Category I. In addition to geological, geophysical, and seismological

investigations, detailed geotechnical engineering investigations as described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. C.6), should be conducted at the site.

Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-7C.2.4Surface-Fault Rupture and Associated Deformation at the Site Sites that have a potential for fault rupture at or near the ground surface and associated deformation should be avoided. Where it is determined that surface deformation need not be taken into

account, sufficient data or detailed studies to reasonably support the determination should be presented.

The presence or absence of Quaternary faulting at the site needs to be evaluated to determine whether

there is a potential hazard that is caused by surface faulting. The potential for surface fault rupture

should be characterized by evaluating (1) the location and geometry of faults relative to the site, (2) the

nature and amount of displacement (sense of slip, cumulative slip, slip per event, and nature and extent of

related folding and/or secondary faulting), and (3) the likelihood of displacement during some future

period of concern (recurrence interval, slip rate, and elapsed time since the most recent displacement).

Acceptable methods and approaches for conducting these evaluations are described in NUREG/CR-5503 (Ref. C.3); acceptable geochronology dating methods are described in NUREG/CR-5562 (Ref. C.5).

For assessing the potential for fault displacement, the details of the spatial pattern of the fault zone (e.g., the complexity of fault traces, branches, and en echelon patterns) may be important as they

may define the particular locations where fault displacement may be expected in the futur

e. The amount

of slip that might be expected to occur can be evaluated directly based on paleoseismic investigations or

it can be estimated indirectly based on the magnitude of the earthquake that the fault can generate.

Both non-tectonic and tectonic deformation can pose a substantial hazard to a nuclear power plant, but there are likely to be differences in the approaches used to resolve the issues raised by the two

types of phenomena. Therefore, non-tectonic deformation should be distinguished from tectonic

deformation at a site. In past nuclear power plant licensing activities, surface displacements caused by

phenomena other than tectonic phenomena have been confused with tectonically induced faulting. Non-

tectonic structures are those found in karst terrain and those resulting from growth faultin

g. The nature

of faults related to collapse features can usually be defined through geotechnical investigations and can

either be avoided or, if feasible, adequate engineering fixes can be provided.

Glacially induced faults generally do not represent a deep-seated seismic or fault displacement hazard because the conditions that created them are no longer present. However, residual stresses from

Pleistocene glaciation may still be present in glaciated regions, although they are of less concern than

active tectonically induced stresses. These features should be investigated with respect to their

relationship to current in situ stresses.

Large, naturally occurring growth faults as those found in the coastal plain of Texas and Louisiana can pose a surface displacement hazard, even though offset most likely occurs at a much less

rapid rate than that of tectonic faults. They are not regarded as having the capacity to generate damaging

vibratory ground motion, can often be identified and avoided in siting, and their displacements can be

monitored. Some growth faults and antithetic faults related to growth faults and fault zones should be

investigated in regions where growth faults are known to be present. Local human-induced growth

faulting can be monitored and controlled or avoided.

If questionable features cannot be demonstrated to be of non-tectonic origin, they should be treated as tectonic deformation.

Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-8C.2.5Site Geotechnical Investigations and Evaluations C.2.5.1 Geotechnical Investigations The geotechnical investigations should include, but not necessarily be limited to, (1) defining site soil and near-surface geologic strata properties as may be required for hazard evaluations, engineering

analyses, and seismic design; (2) evaluating the effects of local soil and site geologic strata on ground

motion at the ground surface; (3) evaluating dynamic properties of the near-surface soils and geologic

strata; (4) conducting soil-structure interaction analyses; and (5) assessing the potential for soil failure or

deformation induced by ground shaking (liquefaction, differential compaction, and land sliding).

Subsurface conditions should be investigated by means of borings, soundings, well logs, exploratory excavations, sampling, geophysical methods (e.g., cross-hole, down-hole, and geophysical

logging) that adequately assess soil and ground-water conditions and other methods described in

Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. C.6). Appropriate investigations should be made to determine the

contribution of the subsurface soils and rocks to the loads imposed on the structures.

A laboratory testing program should be carried out to identify and classify the subsurface soils and rocks and to determine their physical and engineering properties. Laboratory investigations and

testing practices acceptable to the NRC staff are described in Regulatory Guide 1.138 (Ref. C.7).

Laboratory tests for both static and dynamic properties (e.g., shear modulus, damping, liquefaction

resistance, etc.) are generally required. The dynamic property tests should include cyclic triaxial tests, cyclic simple shear tests, cyclic torsional shear tests, and resonant column tests, as appropriat

e. Both

static and dynamic tests should be conducted as recommended in American Society for Testing and

Materials (ASTM) standards or test procedures acceptable to the staff. The ASTM specification

numbers for static and dynamic laboratory tests can be found in the annual books of ASTM Standards, Volume 04.08. Sufficient laboratory test data should be obtained to allow for reasonable assessments of

mean values of soil properties and their potential variability.

C.2.5.2 Ground Failure Evaluations Liquefaction is a soil behavior phenomenon in which cohesionless soils (sand, silt, or gravel)

under saturated conditions lose a substantial part or all of their strength because of high pore water

pressures generated in the soils by strong ground motions induced by earthquake

s. Potential effects of

liquefaction include reduction in foundation bearing capacity, settlements, land sliding and lateral

movements, flotation of lightweight structures (such as tanks) embedded in the liquefied soil, and

increased lateral pressures on walls retaining liquefied soil. Guidance in Regulatory Guide 1.198,

"Procedures and Criteria for Assessing Seismic Soil Liquefaction at Nuclear Power Plant Sites," (Ref.

C.8), should be used for evaluating the site for liquefaction potential.

Investigations of liquefaction potential typically involve both geological and geotechnical engineering assessments. The parameters controlling liquefaction phenomena are (1) the lithology of the

soil at the site, (2) the ground water conditions, (3) the behavior of the soil under dynamic loadings, and

(4) the potential severity of the vibratory ground motion.

In addition to liquefaction, a number of other forms of ground failure or ground settlement should be investigated. These forms of ground failure and ground settlement include localized soft

zones, karst features, seismic settlement of non-saturated soils, all forms of mass wasting, and any other

form of ground deformation that has the capacity to impact foundation performance or design.

Appendix C to RG 1.208, Page C-9C.3Evaluation of New Information Obtained from the Site-specific Investigations The first step in reviewing the new information obtained from the site-specific investigations with previous interpretations is determining whether the following existing parameters are consistent

with the new information: (1) the range of seismogenic sources as interpreted by the seismicity experts

or teams involved in the study, (2) the range of seismicity rates for the region around the site as

interpreted by the seismicity experts or teams involved in the studies, (3) the range of maximum

magnitudes determined by the seismicity experts or teams, and (4) attenuation relation

s. The new

information is considered not significant and no further evaluation is needed if it is consistent with the

assumptions used in the PSHA, no additional alternative seismic sources or seismic parameters are

needed, or it supports maintaining the site mean seismic hazard.

APPENDIX C REFERENCESC.1Electric Power Research Institute, "The Earthquakes of Stable Continental Regions," Volume 1:

Assessment of Large Earthquake Potential, EPRI TR-102261-V1, 1994.C.2Budnitz, R.J., et al., "Recommendations for Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis: Guidance on Uncertainty and Use of Experts," NUREG/CR-6372, Volumes 1 and 2, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory

Commission, Washington, DC, April 1997.C.3Hanson, K.L., et al., "Techniques for Identifying Faults and Determining Their Origins,"

NUREG/CR-5503, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, 1999.C.4International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), "Earthquakes and Associated Topics in Relation to Nuclear Power Plant Siting," Safety Series No. 50-SG-S1, Revision 1, 1991.C.5Sowers, J.M., et al., "Dating and Earthquakes: Review of Quaternary Geochronology and Its Application to Paleoseismology," NUREG/CR-5562, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, 1998.C.6Regulatory Guide 1.132, "Site Investigations for Foundations of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S.

Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.C.7Regulatory Guide 1.138, "Laboratory Investigations of Soils and Rocks for Engineering Analysis and Design of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.C.8Regulatory Guide 1.198, "Procedures and Criteria for Assessing Seismic Soil Liquefaction at Nuclear Power Plant Sites," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.

Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-1 APPENDIX D

DEVELOPMENT OF SEISMIC HAZARD INFORMATION BASE AND

DETERMINATION OF CONTROLLING EARTHQUAKESD.1Introduction This appendix discusses site-specific development of seismic hazard levels and elaborates on methods to meet the goals discussed in Regulatory Position 3 of this regulatory guid

e. This appendix

describes a methods for undertaking probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA), performing

deaggregation of the results of the PSHA, and determining the controlling earthquakes that are developed

for comparison with identified local and regional seismic sources. The controlling earthquakes can also

be used to develop appropriate ground motions for the site response analysis. The deaggregation of the

mean probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA) results determines the contribution of individual

magnitude and distance ranges to the overall seismic hazard. Information from the deaggregation is

useful to both review the PSHA and understand the seismic sources that contribute most to hazard at the

site.The controlling earthquakes are developed from the deaggregation of the PSHA results at ground motion levels corresponding to the annual frequencies of 1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06 and are based on the

magnitude and distance values that contribute most the to hazard at the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz and the

average of 5 and 10 Hz. While the ASCE/SEI Standard 43-05 (Ref. D.2) approach only requires

calculation of ground motion levels with mean annual probabilities of 1 E-04 and 1 E-05, NRC

confirmatory activities also specify calculation of ground motion levels with a mean annual probability of

1 E-06. Using the controlling earthquakes, Regulatory Position 4 and Appendix E to this regulatory

guide describe one acceptable procedure for determining the appropriate ground motion for the site

response analysis to determine the performance-based safe shutdown earthquake ground motion (SSE).D.2Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Assessment Site-specific PSHA should be performed using the methodology described in Regulatory Positions 3.3 and 3.4 of this regulatory guide. Steps taken relative to the PSHA methodology are

summarized as follows:*Perform the PSHA for actual or assumed rock conditions with up-to-date interpretations of earthquake sources, earthquake recurrence, and strong ground motion estimation using original

or updated sources as determined in Regulatory Positions 3.1 and 3.2.*CAV filtering can be used in place of a lower-bound magnitude cutoff (Ref. D.1).

  • Conduct the hazard assessment at a minimum of 30 frequencies, approximately equally spaced on a logarithmic frequency axis between 100 and 0.1Hz.*Report fractile hazard curves at the following fractile levels (p) for each ground motion parameter: 0.05, 0.16, 0.50, 0.84, and 0.95, as well as the mean. Report the fractile hazard

curves in tabular as well as graphical format.*Determine the mean uniform hazard response spectra (UHRS) for annual exceedance frequencies of 1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06.

1The recommended magnitude and distance bins and procedure used to establish controlling earthquakes weredeveloped for application in the CEUS, where the nearby earthquakes generally control the response in the 5 to 10 Hz frequency range, and larger but distant events can control the lower frequency range. For other situations, alternative binning schemes as well as a study of contributions from various bins are necessary to identify controlling earthquakes,consistent with the distribution of the seismicity.Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-2D.3Deaggregation of PSHA Results Deaggregation is undertaken as a way to better understand the earthquakes that contribute most to hazard at the site of interest. It is also used to assess the reasonableness of the PSHA results and is further used

to develop controlling earthquakes as described in the section below. Deaggregation can be performed

using the following steps.

Deaggregation Step 1(a)Using the annual probability levels of 1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06, determine the ground motion levels for the spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz from the total mean hazard obtained in

Step 1.(b)Calculate the linear average of the ground motion level for the 1 and 2.5 Hz and the 5 and 10 Hz spectral acceleration pairs.

Deaggregation Step 2 Perform a deaggregation of the PSHA for each of the spectral accelerations and annual probability levels as enumerated in Step 1, and provide a table (such as illustrated in Table D.1

1) for each of the 12 cases. The deaggregation is performed to obtain the relative contribution to the hazard for each

of the magnitude-distance bins for each case.

Table D.1 Recommended Magnitude and Distance Bins Moment Magnitude Range of Bins Distance Range of Bin (km)5 - 5.55.5 - 66 - 6.56.5 - 7>7

0 - 15 15 - 25

25 - 50 50 - 100 100 - 200

200 - 300>300

Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-3 Deaggregation Step 3 If the deaggregated results for each of the 12 cases is not in terms of the fractional contribution to the total hazard then perform the steps as described below. Otherwise, average the low-frequency (1 and

2.5 Hz) and high-frequency (5 and 10 Hz) deaggregation results.

From the deaggregated results of Step 2, the mean annual probability of exceeding the ground motion levels of Step 2(a) (spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz) are determined for each

magnitude-distance bin. These values are denoted by H

mdf.Using H mdf values, the fractional contribution of each magnitude and distance bin to the total hazard for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, P(m,d)

1 , is computed according to the following:

P(m,d)1 = [( H mdf ) / 2 ] ÷ [ ( H mdf ) / 2 ](Equation 1)

f = 1,2 m d f = 1,2 where f = 1 and f = 2 represent the ground motion measure at 1 and 2.5 Hz, respectively.

The fractional contribution of each magnitude and distance bin to the total hazard for the average of 5 and 10 Hz, P(m,d)

2 , is computed according to the following:

P(m,d)2 = [( H mdf ) / 2 ] ÷ [ ( H mdf ) / 2 ](Equation 2)

f = 1,2

m d f = 1,2 where f = 1 and f = 2 represent the ground motion measure at 5 and 10 Hz, respectively.

Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-4D.4Procedure To Determine Controlling Earthquakes The following approach is acceptable to the NRC staff for determining controlling earthquakes which are used by the staff to assess the reasonableness of the PSHA results and can be used for the site

response analyses. This procedure is based on a deaggregation of the mean probabilistic seismic hazard

in terms of earthquake magnitudes and distances. When the controlling earthquakes have been obtained, the site specific earthquake ground motion can be developed according to the simplified procedures

described in Appendix E. The SSE response spectrum is then determined according to the procedures

described in Regulatory Position 5.

Step 1 for Determining Controlling Earthquakes Review the magnitude-distance distribution for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz to determine whether the contribution to the hazard for distances of 100 kilometer (km) (63 mi) or greater is substantial (on the

order of 5 percent or greater).

If the contribution to the hazard for distances of 100 km (63 mi) or greater exceeds 5 percent, additional calculations are needed to determine the controlling earthquakes using the magnitude-distance

distribution for distances greater than 100 km (63 mi). This distribution, P > 100 (m,d)

1 , is defined by the following:

P > 100 (m,d)

1 = [ P(m,d)

1 ] ÷ [ P(m,d)

1 ](Equation 3)

m d > 100 The purpose of this calculation is to identify a distant, larger event that may control low-frequency content of a response spectrum.

The distance of 100 km (63 mi) is chosen for CEUS sites. However, for all sites the results of full magnitude-distance distribution should be carefully examined to ensure that proper controlling

earthquakes are clearly identified.

Step 2 for Determining Controlling Earthquakes Calculate the mean magnitude and distance of the controlling earthquake associated with the ground motions determined in Step 1 of the deaggregation (above) for the average of 5 and 10 H

z. The

following relation is used to calculate the mean magnitude using results of the entire magnitude-distance

bins matrix:

M c (5 - 10 Hz) = m P(m,d)2 (Equation 4)

m d where m is the central magnitude value for each magnitude bin.

The mean distance of the controlling earthquake is determined using results of the entire magnitude-distance bins matrix:

Ln {D c (5 - 10 Hz)} = Ln(d) P(m,d)2 (Equation 5)

d m where d is the centroid distance value for each distance bin.

Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-5 Step 3 for Determining Controlling Earthquakes If the contribution to the hazard calculated in Step 5 for distances of 100 km (63 mi) or greater exceeds 5 percent for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, calculate the mean magnitude and distance of the

controlling earthquakes associated with the ground motions determined in Step 2 for the average of 1 and

2.5 Hz. The following relation is used to calculate the mean magnitude using calculations based on

magnitude-distance bins greater than distances of 100 km (63 mi) as discussed in Step 1:

M c (1 - 2.5 Hz) = m P > 100 (m,d)

1 (Equation 6)

m d > 100 where m is the central magnitude value for each magnitude bin.

The mean distance of the controlling earthquake is based on magnitude-distance bins greater than distances of 100 km (63 mi) as discussed in Step 5 and determined according to the following:

Ln {D c (1 - 2.5 Hz)} = Ln(d) P > 100 (m,d)

2 (Equation 7)

d > 100

m where d is the centroid distance value for each distance bin.

When more than one earthquake magnitude-distance pair contributes significantly to the spectral accelerations at a given frequency, it may be necessary to use more than one controlling earthquake for

determining the spectral response at the frequency.

Step 4 for Determining Controlling Earthquakes Document the high- and low-frequency controlling earthquakes for each target annual probability of exceedance in the tabular form illustrated in Table D.2.

2 Copies may be purchased from the American Society for Civil Engineers (ASCE), 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20190 [phone: 800-548-ASCE (2723)]. Purchase information is available through the ASCE Web site at

http://www.asce.org/bookstore/book.cfm?isbn=0784407622Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-6 Table D.2 High- and Low-Frequency Controlling EarthquakesHazardMagnitude (m b)Distance Mean 1 E-04 High-Frequency (5 and 10 Hz)

Mean 1 E-04 Low-Frequency (1 and 2.5 Hz)

Mean 1 E-05 High-Frequency (5 and 10 Hz)

Mean 1 E-05 Low-Frequency (1 and 2.5 Hz)

Mean 1 E-06 High-Frequency (5 and 10 Hz)

Mean 1 E-06 Low-Frequency (1 and 2.5 Hz)

APPENDIX D BIBLIOGRAPHYD.1Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), and U.S. Department of Energy (DOE), "Program on Technology Innovation: Use of Minimum CAV in Determining Effects of Small Magnitude

Earthquakes on Seismic Hazard Analyses," Report 1012965, December 2005.D.2ASCE/SEI 43-05, "Seismic Design Criteria for Structures, Systems, and Components in Nuclear Facilities," American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute, 2005.

2D.3Sobel.P., "Revised Livermore Seismic Hazard Estimates for Sixty-Nine Nuclear Power Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains," NUREG-1488, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, April 1994.D.4Savy, J.B., et al., "Eastern Seismic Hazard Characterization Update," UCRL-ID-115111, Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, June 1993.D.5Bernreuter, D.L., et al., "Seismic Hazard Characterization of 69 Nuclear Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains," NUREG/CR-5250, Volumes 1-8, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC, January 1989.D.6Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), "Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Evaluations at Nuclear Power Plant Sites in the Central and Eastern United States," NP-4726, All Volumes, 1989-1991.

Appendix D to RG 1.208, Page D-7D.7Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), "The Earthquakes of Stable Continental Regions,"

Volume 1: Assessment of Large Earthquake Potential, EPRI TR-102261-V1, 1994.D.8Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), et al., "CEUS Ground Motion Project Final Report,"

Report 1009684, 2004.

Appendix E to RG 1.208, Page E-1 APPENDIX E

SEISMIC WAVE TRANSMISSION ANALYSISE.1Introduction The horizontal and vertical safe shutdown earthquake ground motion (SSE) should be determined in the free field on the ground surface. For sites that have materials with V

s less than the assumed generic rock shear wave velocity, as defined in the probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA), a site response analysis should be performed. This appendix discusses the site-specific

information needed for these analyses and elaborates on one of the acceptable site response methods

discussed in NUREG/CR-6728 that can be used to meet the intent of Regulatory Position 4 of this

regulatory guide. The method described is a simplified approach and, as such, some sites may require

more detailed analyses as described in NUREG/CR-6728.

The input ground motion used in the analyses are specified based on the PSHA, which assumes that an outcrop or a hypothetical outcrop exists at the free-field surface. If the rock layer (as defined by

shear wave velocity) first occurs at depth, the input ground motions are deconvolved to develop "within"

motions and imposed at the generic rock horizon.

The purpose of the method described in this appendix is to develop the uniform hazard response spectrum (UHRS) at the free-field ground surface. The hazard curves from the PSHA are defined for

generic rock conditions as defined by the attenuation relationships used in the PSHA. In the central and

eastern united states (CEUS), rock is usually defined as that material with a shear wave velocity (V

s) of about 2.8 km/sec (9,200 ft/sec). To properly address amplification or deamplification effects of the soils

between the generic rock horizon, the ground surface, and other interfaces in between, the following

procedure should be used:(1)Develop the site-specific soil profile.

(2)Develop appropriate modified earthquake time histories to be used in site response analyses.

(3)Perform a suite of site response analyses to determine mean site amplification functions for a range of frequencies.(4)Develop the UHRS at the free ground surface based on the generic rock-based PSHA and the mean site amplification functions.E.2Site-Specific Soil Profile Site and laboratory investigations and testing are performed to obtain data defining the static and dynamic engineering properties of soil and rock materials, and their spatial distributio

n. The procedures

identified in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. E.1), Regulatory Guide 1.138 (Ref. E.2), and subsection

C.2.2.2 of Appendix C to this regulatory guide are acceptable to the NRC staff.

Appendix E to RG 1.208, Page E-2 The seismic wave transmission characteristics (spectral amplification or deamplification) of the materials overlying bedrock at the site should be described over a range of frequencies that include the

significant structural frequencies. The wave transmission characteristics should be developed for levels

of seismic motion ranging from those causing very small strains (i.e., no soil degradation) to those

consistent with strain levels anticipated in the SSE. The following material properties should be

determined for each stratum under the site: (1) thickness, (2) compressional velocity, (3) shear wave

velocity, (4) bulk densities, (5) soil index properties and classification, (6) shear modulus and damping

variations with strain level, and (7) the water table elevation and its variation throughout the site.

Internal friction angle, cohesive strength and over-consolidation ratio for clay are also needed for non-

linear analyses. Site specific soil profiles should be deep enough to fully capture the amplification to the

lowest structural frequency of interest and should extend to the depth at which the input ground motion is

to be imposed.

The strain-dependent shear modulus and damping curves are developed based on site-specific testing results and supplemented as appropriate by published data for similar soil

s. One source of

published data is the EPRI 93 curves (Ref. E.3). The strain-dependent shear modulus and damping

curves incorporated into the analysis should be justified against observed data for each soil at the site.

When the site-specific laboratory data are developed, the result should be compared to earthquake

recordings on similar soils. A maximum critical damping value of 15 percent is allowed in site response

analyses. The effects of confining pressures (that reflect the depths of the soil) on these strain-dependent

soil dynamic characteristics are assessed and considered in site response analyse

s. The variability in

these properties is accounted for in the site response analyses.

Often vertically propagating shear waves are the dominant contributor to free-field ground motions at a site. In these cases, a one-dimensional equivalent-linear analysis or nonlinear analysis that

assumes vertical propagation of shear waves may be appropriate. However, site characteristics (such as a

dipping bedrock surface or other impedance boundaries), regional characteristics (such as topographic

effects), and source characteristics (such as nearby dipping seismic sources) may require that analyses be

able to also account for inclined waves. Multi-dimensional soil models may be needed if complex

geologic and geotechnical conditions exist.E.3Site Response Analysis Due to the non-linear nature of site response, the choice of input ground motions has a significant impact on the amplification of motion observed in the soil column. One way to approach this problem is

to use controlling earthquakes determined from deaggregation of the PSHA results, as described in

Appendix D. The controlling earthquakes are developed to focus the analyses on the types of scenarios

most likely to impact the site. However, for some sites additional earthquake scenarios may be needed to

adequately reflect the full UHRS, particularly in the intermediate frequency range.

The response spectra for each of the controlling earthquakes should be developed using either appropriate attenuation relationships or the appropriate response spectrum from NUREG/CR-672

8. The

CEUS spectral shapes described in NUREG/CR-6728 are for both a single corner and double corner

source model. These two models should be evenly weighted and accounted for in the development of the

input time histories. The resulting response spectra are then scaled to match the site rock spectral

accelerations at 7.5 Hz (high-frequency), 1.75 Hz (low-frequency), and an intermediate frequency range

as appropriate.

Appendix E to RG 1.208, Page E-3 The fundamental frequency of the site can be approximated prior to analysis using simplified methods. Once the spectra for the input earthquakes are determined and scaled, the spectra are plotted

and compared against the fundamental frequency of the soil to ensure that the spectra from at least one

key earthquake scenario has sufficient energy content at the natural frequency of the site as determined

by the full rock-based UHRS. Because the non-linear behavior of the soil will decrease the fundamental

frequency of the site, this comparison should be verified upon completion of the analyse

s. The soil

response is typically highest at the natural period of the soil. Therefore, applying a suite of cases that are

deficient in this range may not adequately predict the true site specific UHRS. A visual comparison of

the spectra from the controlling earthquakes, the UHRS spectra, and the natural frequency of the soil

column should be provided.

After determining the scaled response spectra from each of the input earthquakes, corresponding acceleration time histories are identified and their spectra compared to the target earthquakes spectra.

The acceleration time histories are modified to match the target spectra. The scaled time histories, which

were recorded as outcrop motions, are imposed in the developed subsurface model (and are typically first

converted to equivalent "within" motions at the bedrock level). The imposed motions propagate through

the analytical model of the site soils to determine the free-field surface ground motions (Regulatory

Position 4.2). Only acceleration time histories modified from recorded earthquakes are used for this

purpose. A sufficient number of time histories should be used to get reasonably consistent average

results.As a minimum, the results of the site response analysis should show the input motion (rock response spectra), output motion (surface response spectra), and spectral amplification function (site

ground motion transfer function) at the surface. It is common practice to also provide a plot showing the

peak accelerations in the soil as a function of depth. In addition to developing the spectral amplifications

functions at the surface, it is also useful to simultaneously develop the spectral amplification functions

for the foundation level for use in development of the SSE. However, because the location of the

foundation is not always known at the time at which the analyses are undertaken, the functions may be

determined at several depths including the deepest depth from the Plant Parameter Envelope. In addition, determining and providing the spectral amplification functions at a variety of depths may support review

of the results used in determining the soil UHRS and the SSE.

Due to the non-linear nature of the analyses and the heterogeneity of the soil, sufficiently capturing the variability of the soil response at the site requires that at least 60 randomized shear velocity

profiles are paired with 60 sets of randomized shear modulus and damping curves (i.e., one shear velocity

profile with one set of modulus reduction and damping curves). The use of 60 profiles is generally

adequate to determine a reliable estimate of the standard deviation of the site respons

e. To determine the

UHRS at the free-field ground surface, the site amplification functions (spectral ratios) for each input

earthquake are computed. The mean site amplification function is obtained for each input earthquake

scenario by dividing the response spectrum from the computed surface motion by the response spectrum

from the input hard-rock surface motion, and computing the arithmetic mean of these 60 individual

response spectral ratios.

Appendix E to RG 1.208, Page E-4 Once the site amplification functions are developed, they are applied to the free-field rock-based UHRS. To determine the site-specific soil UHRS at the free-field ground surface, for each of the annual

exceedance frequencies (1 E-04, 1 E-05, and 1 E-06), multiply the rock-based UHRS by either the high-

or low-frequency site amplification function value at each frequency by the site amplification function

that is most appropriate for that frequency. The appropriate site amplification function is determined for

each frequency based on which of the input earthquakes has a spectral value that is closest to the rock

UHRS at that frequency. At high frequencies, this will be the high-frequency spectral amplification

function, and at low frequencies, the low-frequency site amplification functio

n. By applying the

appropriate (high- or low-frequency) amplification function for each frequency to the mean rock-based

UHRS, the site-specific soil-based UHRS is calculated for the free ground surface. Figure E.1 shows a

comparison of the results of each of the soil amplification functions applied to the free-field rock UHRS

and the final free-field soil UHRS.

As a minimum, the results of the site response analysis should show the input motion (rock response spectra), output motion (surface response spectra), and spectral amplification functions (site

ground motion transfer functions) at the surface. It is common to also provide a plot showing the peak

accelerations in the soil as a function of depth. In addition, determining and providing the spectral

amplification functions at a variety of depths supports review of the results used in determining the soil UHRS and the SSE.

Figure E.1. Free-Surface Soil Uniform Hazard Response Spectra Compared to Spectra Resulting from Scaling of Mean Rock UHRS

by Low- and High-Frequency Amplification Functions Appendix E to RG 1.208, Page E-5E.4Free-Field Ground Surface Uniform Hazard Response Spectra In accordance with Regulatory Position 4.3 of this regulatory guide, the UHRS at the free-field ground surface is determined to form the basis of the SSE. In the method detailed above, the UHRS for

the site is developed by scaling the appropriate UHRS at the rock surface by the appropriate mean site

amplification function developed for either the low- and high-frequency range

s. These smooth UHRS

are used in Regulatory Position 5 of this regulatory guide to develop the performance-based horizontal

and vertical response spectra.

APPENDIX E REFERENCESE.1Regulatory Guide 1.132, "Site Investigations for Foundations of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S.

Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.E.2Regulatory Guide 1.138, "Laboratory Investigations of Soils and Rocks for Engineering Analysis and Design of Nuclear Power Plants," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC.E.3Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), "Guidelines for Determining Design-Basis Ground Motions," EPRI TR-102293, Palo Alto, California, 1993.

Appendix F to RG-1.208, Page F-1 APPENDIX F

CRITERIA FOR DEVELOPING TIME HISTORIES

This appendix provides criteria for developing and evaluating modified ground motions used for soil response. Actual recorded earthquake ground motion or modified recorded ground motions should

be used for the site response analysis. Synthetic motions that are not based on seed recorded time

histories should not be used.

The general objective is to generate a modified recorded accelerogram that achieves approximately a mean-based fit to the target spectrum. That is, the average ratio of the spectral

acceleration calculated from the accelerogram to the target, where the ratio is calculated frequency by

frequency, is only slightly greater than one. The aim is to achieve an accelerogram that does not have

significant gaps in the Fourier amplitude spectrum, but which is not biased high with respect to the target.

Time histories biased high with respect to a spectral target may overdrive (overestimate damping and

stiffness reduction) a site soil column or structure when nonlinear effects are importan

t. Ground motions

or sets of ground motions that are generated to "match" or "envelop" given design response spectral

shapes should comply with the following six steps:(1)The time history should have a sufficiently small time increment and sufficiently long durations.

Time histories should have a Nyquist frequency of at least 50 Hz (e.g., a time increment of at

most 0.010 seconds) and a total duration of 20 seconds. If frequencies higher than 50 Hz are of

interest, the time increment of the record must be suitably reduced to provide a Nyquist

frequency (N

y = 1/(2 t), where t = time increment) above the maximum frequency of interest.

The total duration of the record can be increased by zero packing to satisfy these frequency

criteria.(2)Spectral accelerations at 5 percent damping are computed at a minimum of 100 points per frequency decade, uniformly spaced over the log frequency scale from 0.1 Hz to 50 Hz or the

Nyquist frequency. If the target response spectrum is defined in the frequency range from 0.2 Hz

to 25 Hz, the comparison of the modified motion response spectrum with the target spectrum is

made at each frequency computed in this frequency range.(3)The computed 5 percent damped response spectrum of the average of all accelerograms should not fall more than 10 percent below the target spectrum at any one frequenc

y. To prevent spectra

in large frequency windows from falling below the target spectrum, the spectra within a

frequency window of no larger than +/- 10 percent centered on the frequency should be allowed to

fall below the target spectrum. This corresponds to spectra at no more than nine adjacent

frequency points defined in (2) above from falling below the target spectrum.(4)The mean of the 5 percent damped response spectra should not exceed the target spectrum at any frequency by more than 30 percent (a factor of 1.3) in the frequency range between 0.2 Hz and

25 Hz. If the spectrum for the accelerogram exceeds the target spectrum by more than 30 percent

at any frequency in this frequency range, the power spectral density of the accelerogram needs to

be computed and shown to not have significant gaps in energy at any frequency over the

frequency range. An additional check over the 0.2 to 25 Hz frequency range is that the mean

ratio (ratio of the average record value to the target value) be greater than 1.0.

1The directional correlation coefficient is a measure of the degree of linear relationship between two earthquakeaccelerograms. For accelerograms X and Y, the directional correlation coefficient is given by the following equation:

n _ _ x y = { (1 / n) ( [ (X

i - x ) (Y

i - y) ] ) } ÷ { x y } i = 1 _ _where n is the number of discrete acceleration-time data points, x and y are the mean values, and x and y are thestandard deviations of X and Y, respectively.Appendix F to RG 1.208, Page F-2(5)Because of the high variability in time domain characteristics of recorded earthquakes of similar magnitudes and at similar distances, strict time domain criteria are not recommended. However, modified motions defined as described above should typically have durations (defined by the 5

percent to 75 percent Arias intensity), and ratios V/A and AD/V

2 (A, V, and D are peak ground acceleration, ground velocity, and ground displacement, respectively), which are generally

consistent with characteristic values for the magnitude and distance of the appropriate controlling

events defining the uniform hazard response spectra. However, in some tectonic settings these

criteria may need to be altered to accommodate phenomena, such as, directivity, basin effects, and hanging wall effects.(6)To be considered statistically independent, the directional correlation coefficients between pairs of time histories should not exceed a value of 0.16

1. Simply shifting the starting time of a given accelerogram does not constitute the establishment of a different accelerogram.